Air-cooled chassis power units ___________________

Preface

Fundamental safety
___________________
instructions 1

___________________
System overview 2
SINAMICS
___________________
Line-side power components 3
S120
Air-cooled chassis power units ___________________
Line Modules 4

___________________
Motor Modules 5
Manual
___________________
DC link components 6

___________________
Motor-side power
components 7

___________________
Cabinet design and EMC 8

___________________
Maintenance and Servicing 9

___________________
Appendix A

(GH3), 04/2014
6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG Order number: 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 Copyright © Siemens AG 2004 - 2014.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 05/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in the following categories:
● General documentation/catalogs
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation

Additional information
Using the following link, you can find information on the topics:
● Ordering documentation / overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following e-mail address:
[email protected]

My Documentation Manager
Using the following link, you can find information on how to create your own individual
documentation based on Siemens' content, and adapt it for your own machine
documentation:
http://www.siemens.com/mdm

Training
Using the following link, you can find information on SITRAIN - training from Siemens for
products, systems and drive technology solutions:
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain

FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under
Product Support:
http://support.automation.siemens.com

SINAMICS
You can find information on SINAMICS under:
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 5
Preface

Usage phases and the available tools/documents

Table 1 Usage phases and the available tools/documents

Usage phase Tools

Orientation SINAMICS S sales documentation
Planning/engineering • SIZER engineering tool
• Configuration manuals, motors
Decision making/ordering SINAMICS S120 catalogs
• SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines
(Catalog PM 21)
• SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules,
SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units (catalog D 21.3)
Configuring/installation • SINAMICS S120 Manual for Control Units and Additional System
Components
• SINAMICS S120 Manual for Booksize Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Manual for Air-Cooled Chassis Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Manual for Liquid-Cooled Chassis Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Manual for AC Drives
• SINAMICS S120M Manual for Distributed Drive Technology
Commissioning • STARTER Commissioning Tool
• SINAMICS S120 Getting Started
• SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 CANopen Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Drive Functions Function Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Safety Integrated Function Manual
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
Using/operating • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Drive Functions Function Manual
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
Maintenance/Service • SINAMICS S120 Manual for Control Units and Additional System
Components
• SINAMICS S120 Manual for Booksize Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Manual for Air-Cooled Chassis Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Manual for Liquid-Cooled Chassis Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
List of references • SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual

Air-cooled chassis power units

6 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Preface

Target group
This documentation is intended for machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and
service personnel who use the SINAMICS drive system.

Benefits
This manual provides all the information, procedures and operational instructions required
for commissioning and servicing SINAMICS S120.

Standard scope
The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from the scope of the
functionality of the drive system that is actually supplied.
● Other functions not described in this documentation might be able to be executed in the
drive system. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new controller or when servicing.
● The documentation can also contain descriptions of functions that are not available in a
particular product version of the drive system. The functionalities of the supplied drive
system should only be taken from the ordering documentation.
● Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the
machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on
all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consideration every
conceivable type of installation, operation and service/maintenance.

Technical support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided in the Internet under
Contact:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

EC declaration of conformity
The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21901735/134200
Alternatively, you can contact the Siemens office in your region in order to obtain the EC
Declaration of Conformity.

Note
Complying with the low-voltage directive
When operated in dry areas, SINAMICS S units conform to the Low-Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 7
Preface

Note
Fulfilling the EMC Directive
SINAMICS S units fulfill EMC Directive 2004/108/EC in the configuration specified in the
associated EC Declaration of Conformity for EMC and when the EMC installation guideline
provided in the Configuration Manual with Order No. 6FC5297-0AD30-0AP3 is implemented.

Note
Machinery directive
The devices satisfy the requirements according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC for the
Safety Integrated safety functions.

Note
Ensuring reliable operation
The manual describes a desired state. The required reliable operation and the compliance
with EMC limit values can only be ensured when this is maintained.

EMC limit values for South Korea

The EMC limit values that have to be observed for South Korea correspond to the limit
values of the EMC product standard for variable-speed electric drives EN 61800-3 of
category C2 or of limit value class A, Group 1 according to EN 55011.
With suitable additional measures, the limit values of category C2 or of limit class A, Group
1, are maintained. Additional measures, such as the use of an additional RFI suppression
filter (EMC filter), may be necessary.
In addition, measures for a correct EMC-compliant configuration of the plant are described in
detail in this manual and the "SINAMICS Low-Voltage Configuration Manual".

Spare parts
Spare parts are available on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16612315

Air-cooled chassis power units

8 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Preface

Test certificates
Test certificates for functional safety functions ("Safety Integrated") can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
An up-to-date list of currently certified components is also available on request from your
local Siemens office. If you have any questions relating to certifications that have not yet
been completed, please ask your Siemens contact.

Note on the installation of a UL-approved system

Note
Installation of a UL-approved system
For a UL-approved system use 60/75° C copper conductors only.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 9
Preface

Air-cooled chassis power units

10 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 5
1 Fundamental safety instructions ............................................................................................................ 17
1.1 General safety instructions ..........................................................................................................17
1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF) ...................................................................20
1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) ...........................................................................21
1.4 Industrial security .........................................................................................................................21
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems .........................................................................................22
2 System overview ................................................................................................................................... 25
2.1 The SINAMICS range of drives....................................................................................................25
2.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system .....................................................................................................28
2.3 Technical specifications ...............................................................................................................32
2.4 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude and ambient temperature ..........................34
2.5 Standards .....................................................................................................................................36
2.6 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120..............................................................39
2.6.1 Structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and regulated infeed .....................................39
2.6.2 Structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and unregulated infeed / regenerative
feedback .......................................................................................................................................40
2.6.3 Structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and unregulated infeed .................................41
3 Line-side power components................................................................................................................. 43
3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................43
3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules ...............................................................................................43
3.2.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................43
3.2.2 Safety information ........................................................................................................................44
3.2.3 Dimension drawing ......................................................................................................................47
3.2.4 Technical data ..............................................................................................................................49
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules ......................................................50
3.3.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................50
3.3.2 Safety information ........................................................................................................................51
3.3.3 Dimension drawing ......................................................................................................................54
3.3.4 Technical data ..............................................................................................................................57
3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules ...........................................................................................58
3.4.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................58
3.4.2 Safety information ........................................................................................................................58
3.4.3 Dimension drawing ......................................................................................................................60
3.4.4 Technical data ..............................................................................................................................62
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules ..........................................................................................64
3.5.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................64

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 11
Table of contents

3.5.2 Safety information ....................................................................................................................... 64

3.5.3 Dimension drawing ...................................................................................................................... 66
3.5.4 Technical data ............................................................................................................................. 72
3.6 Active Interface Modules ............................................................................................................. 73
3.6.1 Description .................................................................................................................................. 73
3.6.2 Safety information ....................................................................................................................... 74
3.6.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................... 76
3.6.3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 76
3.6.3.2 Connection example ................................................................................................................... 80
3.6.3.3 Line/load connection ................................................................................................................... 82
3.6.3.4 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500........................................................................................................ 83
3.6.3.5 X530 neutral point grounding ...................................................................................................... 83
3.6.3.6 X609 terminal strip ...................................................................................................................... 84
3.6.3.7 Meaning of the LED on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) in the Active Interface Module ..... 85
3.6.4 Dimension drawing ...................................................................................................................... 86
3.6.5 Electrical connection ................................................................................................................... 90
3.6.6 Technical data ............................................................................................................................. 96
4 Line Modules ........................................................................................................................................ 99
4.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................. 99
4.2 Basic Line Modules ................................................................................................................... 100
4.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 100
4.2.2 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 102
4.2.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 105
4.2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 105
4.2.3.2 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 107
4.2.3.3 Line/load connection ................................................................................................................. 109
4.2.3.4 X9 terminal strip ........................................................................................................................ 110
4.2.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection ................................................................... 111
4.2.3.6 X42 terminal strip ...................................................................................................................... 112
4.2.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ............................................................................... 113
4.2.3.8 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module .................... 114
4.2.4 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 115
4.2.5 Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 117
4.2.6 Precharging circuit for the Basic Line Modules, frame size GD................................................ 121
4.2.7 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 124
4.3 Smart Line Modules .................................................................................................................. 133
4.3.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 133
4.3.2 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 136
4.3.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 139
4.3.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 139
4.3.3.2 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 142
4.3.3.3 Line/load connection ................................................................................................................. 143
4.3.3.4 X9 terminal strip ........................................................................................................................ 144
4.3.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection ................................................................... 144
4.3.3.6 X42 terminal strip ...................................................................................................................... 146
4.3.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ............................................................................... 146
4.3.3.8 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module.................... 147
4.3.4 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 148
4.3.5 Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 151
4.3.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 157

Air-cooled chassis power units

12 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Table of contents

4.4 Active Line Modules ...................................................................................................................164

4.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................164
4.4.2 Safety information ......................................................................................................................167
4.4.3 Interface description ...................................................................................................................170
4.4.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................170
4.4.3.2 Connection example ..................................................................................................................174
4.4.3.3 Line/load connection ..................................................................................................................175
4.4.3.4 X9 terminal strip .........................................................................................................................176
4.4.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection ....................................................................176
4.4.3.6 X42 terminal strip .......................................................................................................................178
4.4.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ................................................................................178
4.4.3.8 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module ....................179
4.4.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................180
4.4.5 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................184
4.4.6 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................186
5 Motor Modules .................................................................................................................................... 195
5.1 Description .................................................................................................................................195
5.2 Safety information ......................................................................................................................197
5.3 Interface description ...................................................................................................................200
5.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................200
5.3.2 Connection example ..................................................................................................................204
5.3.3 DC link/motor connection ...........................................................................................................205
5.3.4 X9 terminal strip .........................................................................................................................206
5.3.5 DCPS, DCNS connection for a dv/dt filter .................................................................................206
5.3.6 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection ....................................................................207
5.3.7 X42 terminal strip .......................................................................................................................208
5.3.8 X46 Brake control and monitoring..............................................................................................209
5.3.9 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402 ................................................................................209
5.3.10 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module .............................210
5.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................211
5.5 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................215
5.6 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................217
5.6.1 510 V DC – 720 V DC Motor Modules .......................................................................................217
5.6.2 675 V DC – 1035 V DC Motor Modules .....................................................................................223
5.6.3 Overload capability ....................................................................................................................230
5.6.4 Current de-rating depending on the pulse frequency ................................................................232
5.6.5 Parallel connection of Motor Modules ........................................................................................234
6 DC link components ............................................................................................................................ 237
6.1 Braking Module ..........................................................................................................................237
6.1.1 Description .................................................................................................................................237
6.1.2 Safety information ......................................................................................................................239
6.1.3 Interface description ...................................................................................................................241
6.1.3.1 Braking Module for frame sizes FX, FB .....................................................................................241
6.1.3.2 Braking Module for frame sizes GX, GB, GD ............................................................................242
6.1.3.3 Braking Module for frame sizes HX, JX .....................................................................................243
6.1.3.4 Connection example ..................................................................................................................244
6.1.3.5 Braking resistor connection ........................................................................................................244
6.1.3.6 X21 digital inputs/outputs ...........................................................................................................245

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 13
Table of contents

6.1.3.7 S1 Threshold switch .................................................................................................................. 246

6.1.4 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 248
6.1.4.1 Installing the Braking Module in an Active Line Module / Motor Module, frame size FX .......... 248
6.1.4.2 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size GX.............................................................................................................. 251
6.1.4.3 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size HX .............................................................................................................. 254
6.1.4.4 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size JX ............................................................................................................... 255
6.1.4.5 Installing the Braking Module in a Basic Line Module, frame size FB ...................................... 256
6.1.4.6 Installing the Braking Module in a Basic Line Module, frame size GB, GD .............................. 258
6.1.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 260
6.2 Braking resistors ....................................................................................................................... 263
6.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 263
6.2.2 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 264
6.2.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 266
6.2.4 Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 267
6.2.5 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 268
7 Motor-side power components .............................................................................................................271
7.1 Sine-wave filter .......................................................................................................................... 271
7.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 271
7.1.2 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 272
7.1.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 274
7.1.4 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 275
7.2 Motor reactors ........................................................................................................................... 276
7.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 276
7.2.2 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 276
7.2.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 278
7.2.4 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 282
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter ......................................................................................... 286
7.3.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 286
7.3.2 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 288
7.3.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 290
7.3.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter ............................................................... 292
7.3.5 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor ............................................................................................. 294
7.3.6 Dimension drawing of the Voltage Peak Limiter ....................................................................... 297
7.3.7 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 300
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter .......................................................................... 307
7.4.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 307
7.4.2 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 309
7.4.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 311
7.4.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter ................................................. 315
7.4.5 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter ..................................... 317
7.4.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 322

Air-cooled chassis power units

14 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Table of contents

8 Cabinet design and EMC .................................................................................................................... 327

8.1 Information .................................................................................................................................327
8.1.1 General ......................................................................................................................................327
8.1.2 Safety information ......................................................................................................................328
8.1.3 Directives ...................................................................................................................................329
8.2 EMC-compliant design and control cabinet configuration .........................................................330
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning .............................................................................................................330
8.3.1 General ......................................................................................................................................330
8.3.2 Ventilation ..................................................................................................................................331
9 Maintenance and Servicing ................................................................................................................. 341
9.1 Chapter content..........................................................................................................................341
9.2 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................342
9.3 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................343
9.3.1 Installation device.......................................................................................................................344
9.3.2 Using crane lifting lugs to transport power blocks .....................................................................345
9.4 Replacing components ..............................................................................................................348
9.4.1 Safety information ......................................................................................................................348
9.4.2 Replacing the power block, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size FX .................349
9.4.3 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size GX ............................................................................................................................352
9.4.4 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size HX.............................................................................................................................355
9.4.5 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size JX .............................................................................................................................361
9.4.6 Replacing the power block, Basic Line Module, frame size FB .................................................364
9.4.7 Replacing the power block, Basic Line Module GB, GD ...........................................................367
9.4.8 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Active Line Module and Motor Module,
frame size FX .............................................................................................................................370
9.4.9 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and
Motor Module, frame size GX ....................................................................................................372
9.4.10 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and
Motor Module, frame size HX ....................................................................................................374
9.4.11 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and
Motor Module, frame size JX .....................................................................................................376
9.4.12 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size FB ............................378
9.4.13 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size GB, GD ....................380
9.4.14 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame sizes FX, GX ....................................................................................................................382
9.4.15 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size HX.............................................................................................................................384
9.4.16 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size JX .............................................................................................................................388
9.4.17 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size FI ........................................................390
9.4.18 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size GI ........................................................392
9.4.19 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size HI ........................................................394
9.4.20 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size JI .........................................................396
9.4.21 Replacing the fan, Basic Line Module, frame sizes FB, GB, GD ...............................................398

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 15
Table of contents

9.4.22 Replacing the DC fuses, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size HX ............................................................................................................................ 400
9.4.23 Replacing the DC fuses, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size JX ............................................................................................................................ 403
9.4.24 Replacing the fan fuses (-F10/-F11) ......................................................................................... 405
9.5 Forming the DC link capacitors ................................................................................................. 406
A Appendix .............................................................................................................................................411
A.1 Cable lugs ................................................................................................................................. 411
A.2 List of abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 412
Index ...................................................................................................................................................417

Air-cooled chassis power units

16 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions

DANGER
Danger to life due to live parts and other energy sources
Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, six steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for shutdown and notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Disconnect the machine from the supply.
– Switch off the machine.
– Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
– Check that it really is in a no-voltage condition, from phase conductor to phase
conductor and phase conductor to protective conductor.
– Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
– Ensure that the motors cannot move.
3. Identify all other hazardous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems,
water.
4. Isolate or neutralize all hazardous energy sources, e.g. by closing switches, grounding
or short-circuiting or closing valves.
5. Secure the energy sources against switching on again.
6. Make sure that the machine is completely locked ... and that you have the right
machine.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse
sequence.

WARNING
Danger to life through a hazardous voltage when connecting an unsuitable power supply
Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched in the event of a fault.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 17
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Danger to life when live parts are touched on damaged devices
Improper handling of devices can cause damage.
Hazardous voltages can be present at the housing or exposed components on damaged
devices.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged devices.

WARNING
Danger to life through electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the cores of power cables that are not used
(e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when not grounded
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when
touched, can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when opening plug connections in operation
When opening plug connections in operation, arcs can result in severe injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a no-voltage state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.

WARNING
Danger to life due to fire spreading if housing is inadequate
Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage.
• Install devices without a protective housing in a metal control cabinet (or protect the
device by another equivalent measure) in such a way that contact with fire inside and
outside the device is prevented.
• Additionally, select the installation site so that an uncontrolled spreading of smoke can
be avoided in the case of a fire.
• Ensure that smoke can escape via designated paths.

Air-cooled chassis power units

18 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Danger to life through unexpected movement of machines when using mobile wireless
devices or mobile phones
Using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones with a transmitter power > 1 W closer than
approx. 2 m to the components may cause the devices to malfunction and influence the
functional safety of machines, therefore putting people at risk or causing material damage.
• Switch the wireless devices or mobile phones off in the immediate vicinity of the
components.

WARNING
Danger to life due to the motor catching fire in the event of insulation overload
There is a greater load on the motor insulation through a ground fault in an IT system.
A possible result is the failure of the insulation with a risk for personnel through smoke
development and fire.
• Use a monitoring device that signals an insulation fault.
• Correct the fault as quickly as possible so the motor insulation is not overloaded.

WARNING
Danger to life due to fire if overheating occurs because of insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in increased downtime and reduced
service lives for devices / systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for
the respective component. They can be found in the dimension drawings or in the
"Product-specific safety instructions" at the start of the respective section.

WARNING
Danger of an accident occuring due to missing or illegible warning labels
Missing or illegible warning labels can result in death or serious injury.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, in the national language if
necessary.
• Replace illegible warning labels.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 19
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF)

NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation test, disconnect the system/machine.
All converters and motors are subject to a high voltage test in the manufacturer's facility.
As a consequence, it is not necessary to carry out additional tasks in the system/machine.

WARNING
Danger to life when safety functions are inactive
Safety functions that are inactive or that have not been adjusted accordingly can cause
operational faults on machines that could lead to serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before
commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system,
including all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted
and activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Run a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.

Note
Important safety notices for safety functions
If you want to use safety functions, you must observe the safety notices in the safety
manuals.

1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF)

WARNING
Danger to life from electromagnetic fields
Electromagnetic fields (EMF) are generated by the operation of electrical power equipment
such as transformers, converters or motors.
People with pacemakers or implants are at a special risk in the immediate vicinity of these
devices/systems.
• Ensure that the persons involved are the necessary distance away (minimum 2 m).

Air-cooled chassis power units

20 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.

NOTICE
Damage through electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged
individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of
aluminum foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table
with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

1.4 Industrial security

Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides automation and drive products with industrial security functions that
support the secure operation of plants or machines. They are an important component in a
holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, our products undergo continuous
development. We therefore recommend that you keep yourself informed with the latest
information and updates of our product.
Information and newsletters can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
To ensure the secure operation of a plant or machine, it is also necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and to integrate the automation and drive
components into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept for the entire plant or
machine. Any third-party products used must also be taken into account.
For more detailed information, go to:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 21
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

WARNING
Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulation (e.g. by viruses, Trojan horses, malware, worms) can cause unsafe
operating states to develop in your installation which can lead to death, severe injuries
and/or material damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
Information and newsletters can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a state-of-the-art, integrated
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
For more detailed information, go to:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the integrated industrial security
concept.

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

The control and drive components of a drive system are approved for industrial and
commercial use in industrial line supplies. Their use in public line supplies requires a
different configuration and/or additional measures.
These components may only be operated in closed housings or in higher-level control
cabinets with protective covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are
used.
These components may only be handled by qualified and trained technical personnel who
are knowledgeable and observe all of the safety instructions on the components and in the
associated technical user documentation.
When assessing the machine's risk in accordance with the respective local regulations (e.g.,
EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer must take into account the following
residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example:
– Hardware defects and/or software errors in the sensors, controllers, actuators, and
connection technology
– Response times of the controller and drive
– Operating and/or ambient conditions outside of the specification
– Condensation / conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of radio devices / cellular phones in the immediate vicinity of the controller
– External influences / damage

Air-cooled chassis power units

22 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

2. In the event of a fault, exceptionally high temperatures, including an open fire, as well as
emissions of light, noise, particles, gases, etc. can occur inside and outside the inverter,
e.g.:
– Component malfunctions
– Software errors
– Operating and/or ambient conditions outside of the specification
– External influences / damage
Inverters of the Open Type / IP20 degree of protection must be installed in a metal control
cabinet (or protected by another equivalent measure) such that the contact with fire inside
and outside the inverter is not possible.
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Influence of electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operating and/or ambient conditions outside of the specification
– Condensation / conductive contamination
– External influences / damage
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a
risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc. if they are too
close.
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly.

Note
The components must be protected against conductive contamination (e.g. by installing them
in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12).
Assuming that conductive contamination at the installation site can definitely be excluded, a
lower degree of cabinet protection may be permitted.

For more information about residual risks of the components in a drive system, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 23
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

Air-cooled chassis power units

24 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
System overview 2
2.1 The SINAMICS range of drives

Field of application
SINAMICS is the family of drives from Siemens designed for machine and plant engineering
applications. SINAMICS offers solutions for all drive tasks:
● Simple pump and fan applications in the process industry
● Complex single drives in centrifuges, presses, extruders, elevators, as well as conveyor
and transport systems
● Drive line-ups in textile, plastic film, and paper machines, as well as in rolling mill plants
● High-precision servo drives for the manufacture of wind turbines
● Highly dynamic servo drives for machine tools, as well as packaging and printing
machines.

Figure 2-1 SINAMICS applications

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 25
System overview
2.1 The SINAMICS range of drives

Variants
Depending on the application, the SINAMICS range offers the ideal variant for any drive
task.
● SINAMICS G is designed for standard applications with induction motors. These
applications have less stringent requirements regarding the dynamics and accuracy of
the motor speed.
● SINAMICS S handles complex drive tasks with synchronous/induction motors and fulfills
stringent requirements regarding
– Dynamics and accuracy,
– Integration of extensive technological functions in the drive control system.

Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation

All SINAMICS versions are based on a platform concept. Common hardware and software
components, as well as standardized tools for design, configuration and commissioning
tasks, ensure high-level integration across all components. SINAMICS handles a wide
variety of drive tasks without system gaps. The different SINAMICS versions can be easily
combined with each other.
SINAMICS is part of the Siemens "Totally Integrated Automation" concept. Integrated
SINAMICS systems covering engineering, data management and communication at the
automation level, result in extremely cost-effective solutions based on SIMOTION,
SINUMERIK and SIMATIC control systems.

Air-cooled chassis power units

26 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system

Figure 2-2 SINAMICS as part of the Siemens modular automation system

Quality management according to DIN EN ISO 9001

SINAMICS is able to meet the highest requirements in terms of quality. Comprehensive
quality assurance measures in all development and production processes ensure a
consistently high level of quality.
Our quality assurance system is certified by an independent authority in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 9001.

Universal applications
SINAMICS meets the requirements of relevant international standards and regulations - from
the EN European standards through IEC to UL and cULus.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 27
System overview
2.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system

2.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system

Modular system for sophisticated drive tasks

SINAMICS S120 solves demanding drive tasks for a wide range of industrial applications
and is, therefore, designed as a modular system. Users can choose from many different
harmonized components and functions to create a solution that best meets their
requirements. SIZER, a high-performance engineering tool, makes it easier to choose and
determine the optimum drive configuration. SINAMICS S120 is enhanced by a wide range of
motors. Whether synchronous or induction, all motor types are supported by SINAMICS
S120.

Particularly suitable for multi-axis applications

Coordinated drives that carry out drive tasks together are used in many mechanical and
plant engineering applications, including running gears in gantry cranes, stretching systems
in the textile industry, or paper machines and rolling mills. These require drives with a
connected DC link which allows cost-saving energy balancing between braking and driving
axes.
SINAMICS S120 features Line Modules (infeed modules) and Motor Modules (inverter
modules) covering a wide power range which, having been designed for seamless
integration, pave the way for compact multi-axis drive configurations.

Air-cooled chassis power units

28 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system

Figure 2-3 SINAMICS S120 system overview

New system architecture with a central Control Unit

Electronically coordinated individual drives work together to perform your drive tasks. Higher-
level controllers operate the drives to achieve the required coordinated movement. This
requires cyclic data exchange between the controller and all the drives. This exchange
usually took place via a field bus, which required a great deal of time and effort for
installation and configuration. SINAMICS S120 takes a different approach. A central Control
Unit controls the drive for all connected axes and also establishes the technological links
between the drives and/or axes. Since all the required data is stored in the central Control
Unit, it does not need to be transferred. Inter-axis connections can be established within a
Control Unit and easily configured in the STARTER commissioning tool using a mouse.
The SINAMICS S120 Control Unit solves basic technological tasks autonomously. For
complex numerical or motion-control tasks, high-performance SIMOTION D modules are
used instead.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 29
System overview
2.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system

DRIVE-CLiQ – the digital interface between all components

All SINAMICS S120 components, including the motors and encoders, are interconnected by
a shared serial interface called DRIVE-CLiQ. The standardized cables and connectors
reduce the variety of different parts and cut storage costs.
Converter boards (Sensor Modules) for converting standard encoder signals to DRIVE-CLiQ
are available for third-party motors or retrofit applications.

Electronic rating plates in all components

All SINAMICS S120 components with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface have an electronic rating
plate. This electronic rating plate contains all the relevant technical data about that particular
component. For motors, for example, this data includes the parameters of the electric
equivalent circuit diagram and characteristic values for the built-in motor encoder. The
Control Unit records this data automatically via DRIVE-CLiQ so that it does not need to be
entered during commissioning or when the equipment is replaced.
In addition to the technical data, the rating plate includes logistical data (manufacturer ID,
order number, and globally unique ID). Since this data can be called up electronically on site
or remotely, all the components used in a machine can always be individually identified,
which helps simplify servicing.

SINAMICS S120 components

The SINAMICS S120 components are primarily used for multi-axis drive tasks.
The following power components are available:
● Line-side power components, such as fuses, contactors, line reactors and line filters for
switching the power supply and complying with EMC regulations.
● Line Modules, which supply power centrally to the DC link.
● DC-link components which are used optionally to stabilize the DC-link voltage.
● Motor Modules, which act as inverters, receive power from the DC link, and supply the
connected motors.
● Motor-side components, such as sine-wave filters, motor reactors, and dv/dt filters for
reducing the voltage loads on the motor windings.
To carry out the required functions, SINAMICS S120 is equipped with:
● A Control Unit that carries out all drive and technological functions across all axes.
● Additional system components that enhance functionality and offer different interfaces for
encoders and process signals.

Air-cooled chassis power units

30 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.2 SINAMICS S120 drive system

SINAMICS S120 components were developed for installation in cabinets. They have the
following features and characteristics:
● Easy to handle, simple installation and wiring
● Practical connection system, cable routing according to EMC requirements
● Standardized design, seamless integration.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 31
System overview
2.3 Technical specifications

2.3 Technical specifications

Technical data
Unless specified otherwise, the following technical data is valid for all the following
components of the SINAMICS S120 drive system.

Table 2- 1 General technical data

Electrical data
Line supply voltage • 3 AC 380 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10%
• 3 AC 500 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10%
Line frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
Output voltage 0 to line connection voltage, depending on the type of infeed.
With an Active Line Module, it is also possible to achieve a higher output
voltage.
Output frequency Vector control: 0 ... 600 Hz
Servo control: 0 ... 650 Hz
V/f control: 0 ... 650 Hz
Electronic power supply 24 VDC (20.4 V ... 28.8 V)
implemented as PELV circuit according to EN 61800-5-1
Ground = Negative polarity grounded via the electronics
Rated short-circuit current according to • 1.1 ... 447 kW: 65 kA
IEC, in conjunction with the specified
• 448 ... 671 kW: 84 kA
fuses and circuit breakers
• 672 ... 1193 kW: 170 kA
• >1194 kW: 200 kA
Rated short-circuit current SCCR (Short- • 1.1 ... 447 kW: 65 kA
Circuit Current Rating)) according to
• 448 ... 671 kW: 84 kA
UL508C (up to 600 V), in conjunction with
the specified fuses or circuit breakers • 672 ... 1193 kW: 170 kA
• >1194 kW: 200 kA
Frequency with which the DC link is Max. 1 precharge every 3 minutes
precharged
Interference suppression
• Standard • Category C3 (second environment) according to EN 61800-3
• With line filter • Category C2 (first environment) according to EN 61800-3
Overvoltage category Class III according to EN 61800-5-1

Air-cooled chassis power units

32 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.3 Technical specifications

Mechanical data
Vibratory load
• Transport 1) • EN 60721-3-2, class 2M2
• Operation • Test values according to EN 60068-2-6 test Fc:
– 10 ... 58 Hz: Constant deflection = 0.075 mm
– 58 ... 150 Hz: Constant acceleration = 9.81 m/s² (1 g)
Shock stressing
• Transport 1) • EN 60721-3-2, class 2M2
• Operation • Test values according to EN 60068-2-27 test Ea: 98 m/s² (10 g) / 20 ms
Ambient conditions
Degree of protection IP00 or IP20 according to EN 60529
Protection class Class I (with protective conductor system) and class III (PELV) according to
EN 61800-5-1
Shock protection EN 50274 and BGV A 3 when used as intended
Permissible ambient and coolant 0 ... +40° C without derating,
temperature (air) during operation for line- >40 ... +55° C, see derating characteristics
side components, Line Modules and
Motor Modules
Permissible ambient and coolant 0 ... +55° C up to 2000 m above sea level
temperature (air) during operation for DC-
link and motor-side power components
Cooling method according to • Active Interface Modules, Basic Line Modules, Smart Line Modules, Active
EN 60146-1-1 Line Modules, Motor Modules: AF
– A: Air cooling
– F: Forced cooling, drive unit inside the device
• Line reactors, sine-wave filters, motor reactors, dv/dt filters with Voltage
Peak Limiter: AN
– A: Air cooling
– N : Natural cooling (convection)
Climatic ambient conditions
• Storage 1) • Class 1K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-1, temperature -25 ... +55 ℃
• Transport 1) • Class 2K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-2, temperature -40 ... +70 °C,
max. air humidity 95% at +40 °C
• Operation • Class 3K3 acc. to EN 60721-3-3,
condensation, splashwater, and ice formation not permitted (EN 60204,
Part 1)
Environmental class/harmful chemical substances
• Storage 1) • Class 1C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-1
• Transport 1) • Class 2C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-2
• Operation • Class 3C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-3

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 33
System overview
2.4 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude and ambient temperature

Organic/biological influences
• Storage 1) • Class 1B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-1
• Transport 1) • Class 2B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-2
• Operation • Class 3B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-3
Degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1
The devices may be operated only in environments with degree of pollution 2
and without condensation. On control cabinets with forced air cooling, foreign
particles must be filtered out of the inflow air through filter mats.
To prevent condensation, the devices can be warmed constantly by heaters.
The Safety Integrated safety function:
The components must be protected against conductive contamination (e.g. by installing them in a cabinet with degree of
protection IP54B according to EN 60529).
Provided that conducted interference can be prevented at the installation site, the degree of protection for the cabinet can
be decreased accordingly.
Installation altitude • > 2000 m above sea level without derating
• > 2000 ... 4000 m above sea level, see derating characteristics
Certificates
Conformity CE (Low Voltage and EMC Directives), Machinery Directive
Standards EN 61800-5-1, EN 60204-1, EN 61800-3, EN 60146-1-1
Approvals (only up to 3 AC 600 V) cULus (File Nos.: E192450, E214113 and E253831)
1) In transport packaging

2.4 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude and ambient

temperature
Chassis units and the associated system components are rated for an ambient temperature
of 40° C and installation altitudes up to 2000 m above sea level.
At ambient temperatures > 40° C, the output current must be reduced. Ambient
temperatures above 55° C are not permissible.
At installation altitudes > 2000 m above sea level, it must be taken into account that the air
pressure, and therefore air density, decreases as the height increases. This reduces the
cooling effect as well as the insulating strength of the air.
As a result of the lower cooling effect, on the one hand, the ambient temperature must be
reduced, and on the other hand, the power loss in the chassis unit must also be reduced by
decreasing the output current; whereby ambient temperatures less than 40° C can be
factored in as countermeasure for compensation.
The following table shows the permissible output currents as a function of installation altitude
and ambient temperature (the permissible compensation between installation altitude and
ambient temperatures of < 40° C – inlet air temperature at the air inlet of the chassis unit – is
taken into account in the specified values).

Air-cooled chassis power units

34 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.4 Derating factors as a function of installation altitude and ambient temperature

The values apply under the precondition that a cooling air flow though the units as stated in
the technical data is ensured.
As a further measure at installation altitudes of 2000 m and 5000 m, the use of an isolating
transformer is required to reduce transient overvoltages according to EN 61800-5-1.

Table 2- 2 Current derating for chassis units as a function of ambient temperature (air intake temperature at the air inlet
of the chassis unit) and installation altitude

Installation altitude Current derating factor (in % of rated current)

above sea level in m at an ambient temperature (air intake temperature) of
20° C 25° C 30° C 35° C 40° C 45° C 50° C 55° C
0 ... 2000 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 93.3% 86.7% 80.0%
... 2500 100% 100% 100% 100% 96.3%
... 3000 100% 100% 100% 98.7%
... 3500 100% 100% 100%
... 4000 100% 100% 96.3%
... 4500 100% 97.5%
... 5000 98.2%

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 35
System overview
2.5 Standards

2.5 Standards

Note
Information on the listed standards
The standards listed in the table below are non-binding and do not in any way claim to be
complete. The standards listed do not represent a guaranteed property of the product.
Only the statements made in the Declaration of Conformity shall be deemed binding.

Table 2- 3 Fundamental, application-relevant standards in succession: EN, IEC/ISO, DIN, VDE

Standards* Title
EN 1037 Safety of machinery; avoiding unexpected starting
ISO 14118
DIN EN 1037
EN ISO 9001 Quality management systems - requirements
ISO 9001
DIN EN ISO 9001
EN ISO 12100-x Safety of Machinery; General Design Guidelines;
ISO 12100-x Part 1: Basic Terminology, Methodology
DIN EN ISO 12100-x Part 2: Technical Principles and Specifications
EN ISO 13849-x Safety of Machinery; Safety-Related Parts of Control Systems;
ISO 13849-x Part 1: General Basic Design Principles
DIN EN ISO 13849-x Part 2: Validation
EN ISO 14121-1 Safety of Machinery - Risk Assessment;
ISO 14121-1 Part 1: Guidelines
DIN EN ISO 14121-1
EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical high-frequency devices (ISM devices) -
CISPR 11 radio interference - limit values and measuring techniques
DIN EN 55011
VDE 0875-11
EN 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters; general requirements and line-commutated converters;
IEC 60146-1-1 Part 1-1: Defining the basic requirements
DIN EN 60146-1-1
VDE 0558-11
EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of machines;
IEC 60204-1 Part 1: General definitions
DIN EN 60204-1
VDE 0113-1
EN 60228 Conductors for cables and insulated leads
IEC 60228
DIN EN 60228
VDE0295
EN 60269-1 Low-voltage fuses;
IEC 60269-1 Part 1: General requirements
DIN EN 60269-1
VDE 0636-1

Air-cooled chassis power units

36 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.5 Standards

Standards* Title
IEC 60287-1 to -3 Cables - Calculation of the current carrying capacity
Part 1: Current carrying capacity equations (100 % load factor) and calculating the losses
Part 2: Thermal resistance -
Part 3: Main sections for operating conditions
HD 60364-x-x Erection of power installations with nominal voltages up to 1000 V;
IEC 60364-x-x Part 200: Definitions
DIN VDE 0100-x-x Part 410: Protection for safety, protection against electric shock
VDE 0100-x-x Part 420: Protection for safety, protection against thermal effects
Part 430: Protection of cables and conductors for overcurrent
Part 450: Protection for safety, protection against undervoltage
Part 470: Protection for safety; use of protection for safety
Part 5xx: Selecting and erecting electrical equipment
Part 520: Cables, conductors, busbars
Part 540: Grounding, protective conductor, potential bonding conductor
Part 560: Electrical equipment for safety purposes
EN 60439 Low-voltage switchgear assemblies;
IEC 60439 Part 1: Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
DIN EN 60439
VDE 0660-500
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
IEC 60529
DIN EN 60529
VDE 0470-1
EN 60721-3-x Classification of environmental conditions
IEC 60721-3-x Part 3-0: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Introduction
DIN EN 60721-3-x Part 3-1: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Long-term storage
Part 3-2: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Transport
Part 3-3: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; stationary use, weather
protected
EN 60947-x-x Low-voltage switchgear
IEC 60947 -x-x
DIN EN 60947-x-x
VDE 0660-x
EN 61000-6-x Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61000-6-x Part 6-1: Generic standard; Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
DIN EN 61000-6-x Part 6-2: Generic standards; Immunity for industrial environments
VDE 0839-6-x Part 6-3: Generic standards; Generic standard emission for residential, commercial and light-
industrial environments
Part 6-4: Generic standards; Generic standard noise emission for industrial environments
EN 61140 Protection against electric shock; Common aspects for installation and equipment
IEC 61140
DIN EN 61140
VDE 0140-1
EN 61800-2 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
IEC 61800-2 Part 2: General requirements - Rating specifications for low-voltage adjustable frequency a.c.
DIN EN 61800-2 power drive systems
VDE 0160-102
EN 61800-3 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
IEC 61800-3 Part 3: EMC - Requirements and specific test methods
DIN EN 61800-3
VDE 0160-103

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 37
System overview
2.5 Standards

Standards* Title
EN 61800-5-x Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
IEC 61800-5-x Part 5: Safety requirements;
DIN EN 61800-5-x Main section 1: Electrical, thermal and energy requirements
VDE 0160-105-x Main section 2: Functional safety requirements
EN 62061 Safety of machinery;
IEC 62061 Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control
DIN EN 62061 systems
VDE 0113-50
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 94.1
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 142 Process Control Equipment
UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Equipment

* The technical requirements in the standards listed are not necessarily identical.

Air-cooled chassis power units

38 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.6 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120

2.6 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120

2.6.1 Structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and regulated infeed

Figure 2-4 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and regulated infeed

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 39
System overview
2.6 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120

2.6.2 Structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and unregulated infeed /
regenerative feedback

Figure 2-5 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and unregulated infeed /
regenerative feedback

Air-cooled chassis power units

40 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 System overview
2.6 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120

2.6.3 Structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and unregulated infeed

Figure 2-6 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120 and unregulated infeed

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 41
System overview
2.6 Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS S120

Air-cooled chassis power units

42 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Line-side power components 3
3.1 General
Line-side power components are used to protect the connected components against
transient or continuous overvoltages and ensure that prescribed limit values are adhered to.

3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules

3.2.1 Description
The line filters limit the conducted interference emitted by the Power Modules to permissible
values.
To reduce emissions, the Line Modules are equipped as standard with a line filter in
accordance with the limit values defined in category C3 (second environment). The
additional line filters described here can be fitted for use in the first environment (category
C2).
In conjunction with line reactors, line filters limit the conducted interference emitted by the
Power Modules to the limit values defined in product standard EN 61800-3. Provided that the
system has been set up in accordance with the EMC installation guidelines, the limit values
at the installation location will be in accordance with the requirements for the first
environment.
The line filters are suitable for TN and TT supply systems grounded at the neutral point.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 43
Line-side power components
3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules

3.2.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperatures of the line filter
The line filter can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the line filter so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach a clearly
visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.
• To prevent adjacent components from suffering damage due to these high
temperatures, maintain a clearance of 100 mm on all sides of the line filter.

NOTICE
Line filter damage by connecting to impermissible line supplies
The line filters are only suitable for direct connection to TN or TT systems with grounded
neutral point. Line filters are designed for connection to systems with a continuous level to
voltage harmonics according to EN 61000-2-4, class 3. Connecting the line filter to other
systems causes damage.
• Only connect the line filter to TN or TT systems with grounded neutral point and a
continuous level to voltage harmonics in accordance with EN 61000-2-4, Class 3.

NOTICE
Line filter damage due to interchanged connections
The line filter will be damaged if the input and output connections are interchanged.
• Connect the incoming line cable to LINE/NETZ L1, L2, L3.
• Connect the outgoing cable to the line reactor to LOAD/LAST L1', L2', L3'.

Air-cooled chassis power units

44 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Insufficient ventilation clearances lead to overheating with associated risk to persons as a
result of smoke and fire. Damage can still occur on the line filter.
• For this reason, maintain the 100 mm clearances above and below the line filter.

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected from mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected from mechanical damage.

CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
Overheating and fire can result when the total length of the motor cables is exceeded.
• Ensure that the total length of the motor cables does not exceed 100 m.

NOTICE
Destruction or damage to additional loads as a result of undesirable line harmonics
Line harmonics can occur if line filters that differ from those listed in this Manual are used.
These can disturb or damage other loads connected to the line supply.
• Only use line filters that are listed in this Manual.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 45
Line-side power components
3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules

NOTICE
Destruction or damage to components by incorrectly connecting the line filter
When incorrectly connecting the line filter, these components can be destroyed or
damaged.
• Only connect the Line Module to the SINAMICS line filter via the associated line reactor.
• Connect additional loads upstream of the SINAMICS line filter (if required, via a
separate line filter).

Note
Disconnect the line filter for a high-voltage test
If a high-voltage test is conducted with alternating voltage in the system, the existing line
filters must be disconnected in order to obtain accurate measurements.
If a high-voltage test is carried out with direct voltage, the connection clip for the interference
suppression capacitor in the Basic Line Module must also be removed, refer to section
"Electrical connection" (Page 117).

Air-cooled chassis power units

46 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules

3.2.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 3-1 Dimension drawing of line filters for Basic Line Modules

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 47
Line-side power components
3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules

Table 3- 1 Dimensions of line filters for Basic Line Modules (all data in mm)

6SL3000- 0BE34-4AA0 0BE36-0AA0 0BE41-2AA0 0BE41-6AA0

0BG34-4AA0 0BG36-0AA0 0BG41-2AA0 0BG41-6AA0
B 360 400 425 505
H 240 265 265 265
T 116 140 145 145
a1 40 40 50 90
a2 25 25 50 50
a3 5 8 10 15
a4 15 15 20 20
a5 11 11 14 14
a6 – – – 40
b 270 310 315 315
h1 200 215 215 215
h2 100 120 142 142
t1 2 3 2.5 2.5
t2 78.2 90 91 91
n1 1) 220 240 240 240
n2 1) 210 250 255 255
n3 330 370 385 465
n4 - 125 127.5 127.5
d 9 12 12 12
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

48 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.2 Line filters for Basic Line Modules

3.2.4 Technical data

Table 3- 2 Technical data of line filters for Basic Line Modules, 380 ... 480 V 3 AC

Order number 6SL3000- 0BE34-4AA0 0BE36-0AA0 0BE41-2AA0 0BE41-6AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 1TE34-2AAx 1TE35-3AAx 1TE38-2AAx 1TE41-5AAx
Basic Line Module 1TE41-2AAx 1TE41-8AAx
Rated power of the Basic kW 200 250 400 710
Line Module 560 900
Rated voltage V 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
Rated current A 440 600 1200 1600
Power loss kW 0.047 0.053 0.119 0.153
Line supply/load connection M10 connecting M10 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
L1, L2, L3/L1', L2', L3' lugs lugs lugs lugs
PE connection M8 M10 M10 M10
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 360 400 425 505
Height mm 240 265 265 265
Depth mm 116 140 145 145
Weight kg 12.3 19.0 25.8 28.8

Table 3- 3 Technical data of line filters for Basic Line Modules, 500 ... 690 V 3 AC

Order number 6SL3000- 0BG34-4AA0 0BG36-0AA0 0BG41-2AA0 0BG41-6AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 1TG33-3AAx 1TG36-8AAx 1TG41-1AAx 1TG41-8AAx
Basic Line Module 1TG34-3AAx 1TG41-4AAx
Rated power of the Basic kW 250 560 900 1500
Line Module 355 1100
Rated voltage V 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
Rated current A 440 600 1200 1600
Power loss kW 0.047 0.053 0.119 0.182
Line supply/load connection M10 connecting M10 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
L1, L2, L3/L1', L2', L3' lugs lugs lugs lugs
PE connection M8 M10 M10 M10
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 360 400 425 505
Height mm 240 265 265 265
Depth mm 116 140 145 145
Weight kg 12.3 19.0 25.8 28.8

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 49
Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

3.3.1 Description
The line filters limit the conducted interference emitted by the Power Modules to permissible
values.
To reduce emissions, the Line Modules are equipped as standard with a line filter in
accordance with the limit values defined in category C3 (second environment). The
additional line filters described here can be fitted for use in the first environment (category
C2).
In conjunction with line reactors and/or the Active Interface Modules limit the conducted
interference emitted by the Power Modules to the limit values defined in product standard
EN 61800-3. Provided that the system has been set up in accordance with the EMC
installation guidelines, the limit values at the installation location will be in accordance with
the requirements for the first environment.
The line filters are suitable for TN and TT supply systems grounded at the neutral point.

Air-cooled chassis power units

50 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

3.3.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperatures of the line filter
The line filter can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the line filter so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach a clearly
visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.
• To prevent adjacent components from suffering damage due to these high
temperatures, maintain a clearance of 100 mm on all sides of the line filter.

NOTICE
Line filter damage by connecting to impermissible line supplies
The line filters are only suitable for direct connection to TN or TT systems with grounded
neutral point. Line filters are designed for connection to systems with a continuous level to
voltage harmonics according to EN 61000-2-4, class 3. Connecting the line filter to other
systems causes damage.
• Only connect the line filter to TN or TT systems with grounded neutral point and a
continuous level to voltage harmonics in accordance with EN 61000-2-4, Class 3.

NOTICE
Line filter damage due to interchanged connections
The line filter will be damaged if the input and output connections are interchanged.
• Connect the incoming line cable to LINE/NETZ L1, L2, L3.
• Connect the outgoing cable to the line reactor to LOAD/LAST L1', L2', L3'.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 51
Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Insufficient ventilation clearances lead to overheating with associated risk to persons as a
result of smoke and fire. Damage can still occur on the line filter.
• For this reason, maintain the 100 mm clearances above and below the line filter.

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected against mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected against mechanical damage.

CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
Overheating and fire can result when the total length of the motor cables is exceeded.
• Ensure that the total length of the motor cables does not exceed 300 m.

NOTICE
Destruction or damage to additional loads as a result of undesirable line harmonics
Line harmonics can occur if line filters that differ from those listed in this Manual are used.
These can disturb or damage other loads connected to the line supply.
• Only use line filters that are listed in this Manual.

Air-cooled chassis power units

52 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

NOTICE
Destruction or damage to components by incorrectly connecting the line filter
When incorrectly connecting the line filter, these components can be destroyed or
damaged.
• Only connect the Line Module to the SINAMICS line filter via the associated line reactor
or the associated Active Interface Module.
• Connect additional loads upstream of the SINAMICS line filter (if required, via a
separate line filter).

Note
Disconnect the line filter for a high-voltage test
If a high-voltage test is conducted with alternating voltage in the system, the existing line
filters must be disconnected in order to obtain accurate measurements.
If a high-voltage test is carried out with direct voltage, the connection clip for the interference
suppression capacitor must also be removed in the Smart Line Module (see Chapter
Electrical connection (Page 151)) or in the Active Interface Module (see Chapter Electrical
connection (Page 90)).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 53
Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

3.3.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 3-2 Dimension drawing for Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

Air-cooled chassis power units

54 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

Table 3- 4 Dimensions of the line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules, 380 V ...
480 V 3 AC (all specifications in mm)

6SL3000- 6SL3000- 6SL3760- 6SL3760-

0BE33-1AA0 0BE35-0AA0 0MB00-0AA0 0MC00-0AA0
B 360 390 425 505
H 240 265 265 265
T 116 140 145 145
a1 40 40 50 90
a2 25 30 50 50
a3 5 8 10 15
a4 15 15 20 20
a5 11 11 14 14
a6 - - - 40
b 270 310 315 315
h1 200 215 215 215
h2 100 120 142 142
t1 2 2.5 2.5 2.5
t2 78.2 90 91 91
n1 1) 220 240 240 240
n2 1) 210 250 255 255
n3 330 370 385 465
n4 - - 127.5 127.5
d 9 12 12 12
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 55
Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

Table 3- 5 Dimensions of the line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules, 500 V ...
690 V 3 AC (all specifications in mm)

6SL3760- 6SL3760- 6SL3760-

0ME00-0AA0 0MN00-0AA0 0MG00-0AA0
B 400 425 505
H 365 365 365
T 140 145 145
a1 38 50 90
a2 30 50 50
a3 8 15 15
a4 15 20 20
a5 11 14 14
a6 - - 40
b 310 315 315
h1 315 315 315
h2 120 142 142
t1 3 2.5 2.5
t2 90 91 91
n1 1) 340 340 310
n2 1) 250 255 255
n3 370 385 465
n4 125 127.5 127.5
d 12 12 12
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

56 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.3 Line filters for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules

3.3.4 Technical data

Table 3- 6 Technical data of the line filters for the Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V

Order No. 6SL3000- 6SL3000- 6SL3760- 6SL3760-

0BE33-1AA0 0BE35-0AA0 0MB00-0AA0 0MC00-0AA0
Suitable for 6SL3330- - 6TE35-5AAx 6TE37-3AAx 6TE41-1AAx
Smart Line Module 6TE41-3AAx
6TE41-7AAx
Suitable for 6SL3330- 7TE32-1AAx 7TE33-8AAx 7TE36-1AAx 7TE38-4AAx
Active Line Module 7TE32-6AAx 7TE35-0AAx 7TE37-5AAx 7TE41-0AAx
7TE41-2AAx
7TE41-4AAx
Rated voltage V 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
Rated current A 400 600 840 1405
Power loss kW 0.042 0.06 0.058 0.111
Line supply/load connection M10 connecting M10 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
L1, L2, L3/L1', L2', L3' lugs lugs lugs lugs
PE connection M8 M10 M10 M10
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 360 390 425 505
Height mm 240 265 265 265
Depth mm 116 140 145 145
Weight kg 12.7 19.9 25.9 28.9

Table 3- 7 Technical data of the line filters for the Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules, 3 AC 500 V ... 690 V

Order number 6SL3760- 6SL3760- 6SL3760-

0ME00-0AA0 0MN00-0AA0 0MG00-0AA0
Suitable for 6SL3330- 6TG35-5AAx 6TG38-8AAx 6TG41-7AAx
Smart Line Module 6TG41-2AAx
Suitable for 6SL3330- 7TG35-8AAx 7TG37-4AAx 7TG41-3AAx
Active Line Module 7TG41-0AAx
Rated voltage V 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
Rated current A 600 1025 1270
Power loss kW 0.063 0.063 0.097
Line supply/load connection M10 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
L1, L2, L3/L1', L2', L3' lugs lugs lugs
PE connection M10 M10 M10
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 400 425 505
Height mm 365 365 365
Depth mm 140 145 145
Weight kg 27.0 36.7 36.7

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 57
Line-side power components
3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules

3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules

3.4.1 Description
Line reactors limit low-frequency line harmonics and reduce the load on the semiconductors
in the Basic Line Modules. A line reactor must be used in connection with a line filter or if
several Basic Line Modules are operated in parallel.
If a Basic Line Module is operated singly and no line filter is used, and with an effective line
impedance uk > 3%, the line reactor is not necessary.

3.4.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperature of the line reactor
The line reactors can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the
surface.
• Mount the line reactors so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach
clearly visible and understandable warning notices at hazardous positions.
• To prevent adjacent components from suffering damage due to these high
temperatures, maintain a clearance of 100 mm on all sides of the line reactors.

NOTICE
Damage to the system caused by line reactors that are not permissible
Line reactors that are not permissible can damage the Line Modules.
Line harmonics that damage/disturb other loads connected to the same line supply can also
occur.
• Only use line reactors which are listed in this Manual.

Air-cooled chassis power units

58 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules

Note
Malfunctions through magnetic fields
Reactors produce magnetic fields that can disturb or damage components and cables.
• Arrange the components and cables at a suitable distance (at least 200 mm) or shield the
magnetic fields appropriately.

Note
Length of connection cables
The connection cables between line reactor and Line Module, as well as between line
reactor and line filter, must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).
You must use shielded connection cables, whose cable shields are attached at both ends.
Shielding can only be omitted if the following conditions are met:
• The cables do not exceed 1 m in length.
• The cables are laid flush with the rear metal wall of the control cabinet.
• The cables are laid in a way that keeps them physically separate from signal cables.
Do not route any cables near the line reactor. If this cannot be avoided, observe a minimum
distance of 200 mm.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 59
Line-side power components
3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules

3.4.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 3-3 Dimension drawing of line reactors for Basic Line Modules

Air-cooled chassis power units

60 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules

Table 3- 8 Dimensions of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V (all values in mm)

6SL3000- 0CE35-1AA0 0CE37-7AA0 0CE41-0AA0 0CE41-5AA0 0CE41-6AA0

a2 30 30 50 60 60
a3 6 6 8 12 12
a4 15 15 25 25 25
a5 14 14 14 14 14
a6 - - - 26 26
a7 - - - 17 17
I4 300 300 350 460 410
I5 100 100 120 152.5 152.5
h1 - - 397 - -
h2 180 180 252 278 278
h3 60 60 120 120 120
h4 269 269 321 435 419
n1 1) 118 118 138 155 155
n2 1) 224 224 264 356 356
n3 212.5 212.5 211.5 235 235
n4 81 81 60 60 60.5
d3 M8 M8 M8 M12 M12
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Table 3- 9 Dimensions of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 500 V ... 690 V (all values in mm)

6SL3000- 0CH32-7AA0 0CH34-8AA0 0CH36-0AA0 0CH41-2AA0 0CH41-6AA0

a2 25 30 30 60 60
a3 5 6 6 12 12
a4 12.5 15 15 25 25
a5 11 14 14 14 14
a6 - - - 26 26
a7 - - - 17 17
I4 270 350 350 460 410
I5 88 120 120 152.5 152.5
h1 - - - - -
h2 150 198 198 278 278
h3 60 75 75 120 120
h4 248 321 321 435 422
n1 1) 101 138 138 155 170
n2 1) 200 264 264 356 356
n3 200 232.5 232.5 235 247
n4 84.5 81 81 60.5 60.5
d3 M8 M8 M8 M12 M12
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 61
Line-side power components
3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules

3.4.4 Technical data

Table 3- 10 Technical data of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 1

Order No. 6SL3000- 0CE35-1AA0 0CE37-7AA0 0CE41-0AA0 0CE41-5AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 1TE34-2AAx 1TE38-2AAx 1TE41-2AAx 1TE41-5AAx
Basic Line Module 1TE35-3AAx
Rated power of the Basic kW 200 400 560 710
Line Module 250
Rated voltage V 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
Ithmax A 508 773 1022 1458
Power loss kW 0.365 0.351 0.498 0.776
Line/load connection M12 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, lugs lugs lugs lugs
1W2
PE connection M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 300 300 350 460
Height mm 269 269 397 435
Depth mm 212.5 212.5 211.5 235
Weight kg 38 51.3 69.6 118

Table 3- 11 Technical data of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 0CE41-6AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 1TE41-8AAx
Basic Line Module
Rated power of the Basic kW 900
Line Module
Rated voltage V 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
Ithmax A 1600
Power loss kW 0.606
Line/load connection M12 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, lugs
1W2
PE connection M6 screw
Degree of protection IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 416
Height mm 435
Depth mm 235
Weight kg 123

Air-cooled chassis power units

62 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.4 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules

Table 3- 12 Technical data of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3000- 0CH32-7AA0 0CH34-8AA0 0CH36-0AA0 0CH41-2AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 1TG33-0AAx 1TG34-3AAx 1TG36-8AAx 1TG41-1AAx
Basic Line Module 1TG41-4AAx
Rated power of the Basic kW 250 355 560 900
Line Module 1100
Rated voltage V 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
Ithmax A 270 482 597 1167
Power loss kW 0.277 0.478 0.485 0.783
Line/load connection M10 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting M12 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, lugs lugs lugs lugs
1W2
PE connection M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 270 350 350 460
Height mm 248 321 321 435
Depth mm 200 232.5 232.5 235
Weight kg 27.9 55.6 63.8 147

Table 3- 13 Technical data of line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 0CH41-6AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 1TG41-8AAx
Basic Line Module
Rated power of the Basic kW 1500
Line Module
Rated voltage V 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
Ithmax A 1600
Power loss kW 0.977
Line/load connection M12 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, lugs
1W2
PE connection M6 screw
Degree of protection IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 416
Height mm 435
Depth mm 250
Weight kg 134

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 63
Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

3.5.1 Description
Line reactors limit low-frequency line harmonics and reduce the load on the semiconductors
in the Smart Line Modules. For this reason, line reactors must always be provided when
Smart Line Modules are used.

3.5.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperature of the line reactor
The line reactors can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the
surface.
• Mount the line reactors so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach
clearly visible and understandable warning notices at hazardous positions.
• To prevent adjacent components from suffering damage due to these high
temperatures, maintain a clearance of 100 mm on all sides of the line reactors.

NOTICE
Damage to the system caused by line reactors that are not permissible
Line reactors that are not permissible can damage the Line Modules.
Line harmonics that damage/disturb other loads connected to the same line supply can also
occur.
• Only use line reactors which are listed in this Manual.

Air-cooled chassis power units

64 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

Note
Malfunctions through magnetic fields
Reactors produce magnetic fields that can disturb or damage components and cables.
• Arrange the components and cables at a suitable distance (at least 200 mm) or shield the
magnetic fields appropriately.

Note
Length of connection cables
The connection cables between line reactor and Line Module, as well as between line
reactor and line filter, must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).
You must use shielded connection cables, whose cable shields are attached at both ends.
Shielding can only be omitted if the following conditions are met:
• The cables do not exceed 1 m in length.
• The cables are laid flush with the rear metal wall of the control cabinet.
• The cables are laid in a way that keeps them physically separate from signal cables.
Do not route any cables near the line reactor. If this cannot be avoided, observe a minimum
distance of 200 mm.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 65
Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

3.5.3 Dimension drawing

Line reactor 6SL3000-0EE36-2AA0

Figure 3-4 Dimension drawing of line reactor 6SL3000-0EE36-2AA0

Table 3- 14 Dimensions (all dimensions in mm)

A B C D1 E1 F1 F2 G1
280 203 264 100 171 50 15 100
G2 G3 H1 H2 H3
– 40 51 194 –
1) Lengths D and E correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

66 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

Line reactor 6SL3000-0EE38-8AA0

Figure 3-5 Dimension drawing of line reactor 6SL3000-0EE38-8AA0, all dimensions in mm

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 67
Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

Line reactor 6SL3000-0EE41-4AA0

Figure 3-6 Dimension drawing of line reactor 6SL3000-0EE41-4AA0

Table 3- 15 Dimensions (all dimensions in mm)

A B C D1 E1 F1 F2 G1
544 232 386 517 182 17 6 180
G2 G3 H1 H2 H3 I J K
23 80.5 59 276 23 227 244 130.5
L M N O P
122 193 320 431 116
1) Lengths D and E correspond to the distance between holes

Note
Remove the crane lifting eyes
The crane lifting eyes can be removed after installation.

Air-cooled chassis power units

68 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

Line reactor 6SL3000-0EH34-7AA0

Figure 3-7 Dimension drawing of line reactor 6SL3000-0EH34-7AA0

Table 3- 16 Dimensions (all dimensions in mm)

A B C D1 E1 F1 F2 G1
330 200 318 100 170 63 16.5 120
G2 G3 H1 H2 H3
– 32 51 194 –
1) Lengths D and E correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 69
Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

Line reactor 6SL3000-0EH37-6AA0

Figure 3-8 Dimension drawing of line reactor 6SL3000-0EE37-6AA0, all dimensions in mm

Note
Remove the crane lifting eyes
The crane lifting eyes can be removed after installation.

Air-cooled chassis power units

70 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

Line reactor 6SL3000-0EE41-4AA0

Figure 3-9 Dimension drawing of line reactor 6SL3000-0EH41-4AA0

Table 3- 17 Dimensions (all dimensions in mm)

A B C D1 E1 F1 F2 G1
566 267 383 613 190 6 16 220
G2 G3 H1 H2 H3 I J K
23 88.5 79.5 236.5 23 22 426 213
L M N O P Q
288 139.5 149.5 11 655 108.5
1) Lengths D and E correspond to the distance between holes

Note
Remove the crane lifting eyes
The crane lifting eyes can be removed after installation.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 71
Line-side power components
3.5 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules

3.5.4 Technical data

Table 3- 18 Technical data, line reactors for Smart Line Modules, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V

Order No. 6SL3000- 0EE36-2AA0 0EE38-8AA0 0EE41-4AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 6TE35-5AAx 6TE41-1AAx 6TE41-3AAx
Smart Line Module 6TE37-3AAx 6TE41-7AAx
Rated power of the Smart kW 250 500 630
Line Module 355 800
Rated voltage V 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
Ithmax A 676.5 973.5 1573
Power loss 50/60 Hz kW 0.500/0.560 0.725/0.810 0.925/1.080
Line/load connection M10 connecting M10 connecting M10 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, lugs lugs lugs
1W2
PE connection M6, 4x M6, 4x M6, 4x
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 300 442 544
Height mm 268 376 431
Depth mm 230 263 244
Weight kg 57 85.5 220

Table 3- 19 Technical data, line reactors for Smart Line Modules, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V

Order number 6SL3000- 0EH34-7AA0 0EH37-6AA0 0EH41-4AA0

Suitable for 6SL3330- 6TG35-5AAx 6TG38-8AAx 6TG41-2AAx
Smart Line Module 6TG41-7AAx
Rated power of the Smart kW 450 710 1000
Line Module 1400
Rated voltage V 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
Ithmax A 511.5 836 1573
Power loss 50/60 Hz kW 0.720/0.820 0.840/0.950 1.680/1.850
Line/load connection M10 connecting M10 connecting M10 connecting
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, lugs lugs lugs
1W2
PE connection M6, 4x M6, 4x M6, 4x
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 360 442 655
Height mm 325 370 383
Depth mm 229 303 288
Weight kg 58 145 239

Air-cooled chassis power units

72 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.1 Description
Active Interface Modules are used in conjunction with the Active Line Modules in chassis
format. The Active Interface Modules contain a Clean Power Filter with basic RI suppression,
the precharging circuit for the Active Line Module, the line voltage sensing circuit and
monitoring sensors.
The bypass contactor is an integral component in frame sizes FI and GI, which ensures a
highly compact design. The bypass contactor must be provided separately for frame sizes HI
and JI.
The vast majority of line harmonics are suppressed by the Clean Power Filter.

The Active Interface Module contains:

● Clean Power Filter
● Line reactor
● Precharging circuit
● Bypass contactor (frame sizes FI/GI)
● Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
● Fan

Table 3- 20 Active Interface Module

Frame size FI Frame size GI Frame size HI Frame size JI

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 73
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Danger to life through electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• Connect cable shields to a grounded housing potential on both sides.

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected against mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected against mechanical damage.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service
lives of Line Modules.
• Observe the ventilation clearances above, below, and in front of the component, which
are specified in the dimension drawings.

Air-cooled chassis power units

74 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

WARNING
Danger of an accident due to missing warning labels in the national language
Missing warning labels in the national language can result in death or serious injury.
• Attach the component warning labels in the national language.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 75
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.3 Interface description

3.6.3.1 Overview

Figure 3-10 Interface overview in the Active Interface Module, frame size FI

Air-cooled chassis power units

76 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-11 Interface overview in the Active Interface Module, frame size GI

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 77
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-12 Interface overview in the Active Interface Module, frame size HI

Air-cooled chassis power units

78 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-13 Interface overview in the Active Interface Module, frame size JI

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 79
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.3.2 Connection example

Figure 3-14 Connection example Active Interface Module, frame sizes FI / GI

Air-cooled chassis power units

80 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-15 Connection example Active Interface Module, frame sizes HI / JI

NOTICE
Damage to the device due to different phase sequence in the precharging and main circuits
During the brief overlap period where both contactors are simultaneously closed, the
precharging resistors of the Active Interface Module could be overloaded and destroyed
due to different phase sequences in the precharging and main circuits.
• Connect the power cables to the precharging and main circuits with the same phase
sequence.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 81
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.3.3 Line/load connection

Table 3- 21 Connections for the Active Interface Module

Terminals Designations
X1: L1, L2, L3 Voltage:
X2: U2, V2, W2
• 3 AC 380 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10 %
• 3 AC 500 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10 %
Frequency: 47 ... 63 Hz
Connecting thread:
• Frame sizes FI / GI: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HI / JI: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
K4: 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3 Connection for pre-charging circuit directly on pre-charging contactor:
(for frame sizes HI / JI
• Frame size HI: 2 x 16 mm² max. (3RT1034)
only)
• Frame size JI: 2 x 35mm² max. (3RT1044)
PE connection Connecting thread:
• Frame sizes FI / GI: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HI / JI: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)

1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

Air-cooled chassis power units

82 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.3.4 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Table 3- 22 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

PIN Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) 24 V power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (50 pcs.) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

3.6.3.5 X530 neutral point grounding

Table 3- 23 Neutral point grounding X530

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 Neutral point of the voltage Jumper inserted: Grounded
sensing measurement
2 Ground potential Jumper not inserted: isolated
measurement

The Voltage Sensing Module is supplied with inserted jumper. When delivered, the neutral
point is connected to the protective conductor via the connector jumper. A current flows to
PE as a result of the voltage to be measured. This connection is removed by removing the
connector jumper. The measurement is then electrically isolated.

Figure 3-16 Internal circuit of the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 83
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.3.6 X609 terminal strip

Table 3- 24 X609 terminal strip

Terminal Designation Technical specifications

1 P24 Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.5 V)
2 P24 Current consumption: Max. 0.25 A
3 M
4 M
5 L Voltage: 230 VAC (195.5 ... 264.5 V)
6 L Current consumption: Max. 10 A
7 N Fan operating currents, see "Technical data"

8 N
9 Precharge contactor–A1 Voltage: 230 VAC To Active Line Module, X9:5
10 Precharge contactor–A2 (195.5 ... 264.5 V) To Active Line Module, X9:6
Current consumption:
Max. 4 A
11 Bypass contactor–A1 Voltage: 230 VAC To Active Line Module, X9:3
12 Bypass contactor–A2 (195.5 ... 264.5 V) To Active Line Module, X9:4
Current consumption:
Max. 6 A
13 Contactor feedback 1 * Voltage: 230 VAC (195.5 ... 264.5 V)
14 Contactor feedback 2 * Max. permissible current: 6 A
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm2

* Series connection NO contact of precharge contactor and bypass contactor (only for frame size FI, GI)

NOTICE
Device failure due to overtemperature caused by incorrect wiring of Active Interface
Modules with frame size HI and JI
During operation, Active Interface Modules of frame sizes HI and JI require a signal on
terminals X609:11 and 12 to control the fans. If this signal is not present during operation,
the fans do not rotate and the module is shut down on overtemperature.
• Connect the signals on terminals X609:11 and 12 to the Active Interface Modules of
frame sizes HI and JI to control the fans.

Air-cooled chassis power units

84 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.3.7 Meaning of the LED on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) in the Active Interface
Module

Table 3- 25 Description of the LED on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) in the Active Interface Module

LED Color State Description

RDY --- Off The electronics power supply is missing or out of tolerance
Green Continuously lit The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.
Orange Continuously lit DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red Continuously lit At least one fault is present in this component.
Note:
LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being
reconfigured.
Green / red Flashing 0.5 Hz Firmware is being downloaded.
Flashing 2 Hz Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON
Green / Flashing 2 Hz Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144)
orange Note:
or The two options depend on the LED status when module recognition is
Red / orange activated via p0144 = 1.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 85
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.4 Dimension drawing

Dimension drawing, frame size FI

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 3-17 Dimension drawing for Active Interface Module, frame size FI Side view, front view

Air-cooled chassis power units

86 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size GI

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 3-18 Dimension drawing for Active Interface Module, frame size GI Side view, front view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 87
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size HI

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 3-19 Dimension drawing for Active Interface Module, frame size HI Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

88 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size JI

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 3-20 Dimension drawing for Active Interface Module, frame size JI Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 89
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.5 Electrical connection

The Active Interface Module is electrically connected in accordance with the connection
examples shown in section "Interface description".

Operating an Active Interface Module on an ungrounded line supply (IT system)

When the device is operated on an ungrounded line supply (IT system), the integrated basic
interference suppression modules must be deactivated by screwing out a connection clip.

Note
Warning label on the connection clip
A yellow warning label is attached to each connection clip so that it is easier to find.
• The warning label must be removed from the connection clip (by pulling it off) if the
connection clip is to remain in the unit (operation on a grounded line supply).
• The warning label must be removed together with the connection clip if the unit is
operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system).

Figure 3-21 Warning label on the connection clip

Air-cooled chassis power units

90 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-22 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Active
Interface Module for frame size FI

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 91
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-23 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Active
Interface Module for frame size GI

Air-cooled chassis power units

92 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-24 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Active
Interface Module for frame size HI

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 93
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Figure 3-25 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Active
Interface Module for frame size JI

Air-cooled chassis power units

94 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

NOTICE
Damage to the device through not removing the connection clip with a non-grounded line
supply
Failure to remove the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module on an
ungrounded line supply (IT system) can cause significant damage to the device.
• With a non-grounded line supply (IT system), remove the connection clip to the basic
interference suppression module.

Removing the connector jumper on the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module

When operating the Active Interface Module on an ungrounded line supply (IT system), at
the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10), remove the connector jumper in terminal X530 at the
lower side of the component.
Use two screwdrivers or another suitable tool to relieve the holding springs in the terminal
and then withdraw the connector jumper.

Terminal X530 with connector jumper Relieve the springs and withdraw the connector
jumper

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 95
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

3.6.6 Technical data

Table 3- 26 Technical data for Active Interface Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3300– 7TE32–6AA0 7TE32–6AA0 7TE33–8AA0 7TE35–0AA0

Suitable for Active Line Module 6SL3330- 7TE32-1AAx 7TE32-6AAx 7TE33-8AAx 7TE35-0AAx
Rated power of kW 132 160 235 300
Active Line Module
Rated current A 210 260 380 490
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
DC-link capacitance
of the drive line-up, max. µF 41600 41600 76800 76800
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17
- Fan supply, 2 AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz, max. A 0.45 / 0.6 0.45 / 0.6 0.9 / 1.2 0.9 / 1.2
- Max. precharging current (max. 3 s) A 57 57 57 57
Bypass contactor included included included included
Power consumption bypass contactor
(230 VAC)
- Making current A 1.25 1.25 2.5 2.5
- Holding current A 0.6 0.6 1.2 1.2
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 2.1 2.2 3.0 3.9
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 2.1 2.2 3.0 3.9
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.24 0.24 0.47 0.47
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
L1, L2, L3 / U2, V2, W2 M10 M10 M10 M10
PE connection M10 screw M10 screw M10 screw M10 screw
Line/load connection
- Line connection (L1, L2, L3) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
- Load connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
- PE connection mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Dimensions
- Width mm 325 325 325 325
- Height mm 1400 1400 1533 1533
- Depth mm 355 355 544 544
Frame size FI FI GI GI
Weight kg 135 135 190 190
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Air-cooled chassis power units

96 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Table 3- 27 Technical data for Active Interface Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3300– 7TE38–4AA0 7TE38–4AA0 7TE41–4AA0 7TE41–4AA0

Suitable for Active Line Module 6SL3330- 7TE36-1AAx 7TE37-5AAx 7TE41-0AAx 7TE41-2AAx
7TE38-4AAx 7TE41-4AAx
Rated power of kW 380 450/500 630 800/900
Active Line Module
Rated current A 605 840 985 1405
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
DC-link capacitance
of the drive line-up, max. µF 134400 134400 230400 230400
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17
- Fan supply, 2 AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz, max. A 3.6 / 4.6 3.6 / 4.6 3.8 / 4.9 3.8 / 4.9
- Max. precharging current (max. 3 s) A 178 178 178 178
Bypass contactor 2) 3RT1476- 3WL1110- 3WL1112- 3WL1116-
6AP36 2BB34-4AN2-Z 2BB34-4AN2-Z 2BB34-4AN2-Z
Z=C22 3) Z=C22 3) Z=C22 3)
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 5.5 6.1 7.5 8.5
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 5.5 6.1 7.5 8.5
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
L1, L2, L3 / U2, V2, W2 M12 M12 M12 M12
PE connection M12 screw M12 screw M12 screw M12 screw
Line/load connection
- Line connection (L1, L2, L3) mm² 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- Load connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- PE connection mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 305 305 505 505
- Height mm 1750 1750 1750 1750
- Depth mm 544 544 544 544
Frame size HI HI JI JI
Weight kg 390 390 620 620
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) Bypass contactor is not included, must be provided separately.
3) The circuit breaker is controlled by the sequential control system of the Active Line Module and must not be switched on
manually. It is therefore recommended that the circuit breaker be equipped with the 3WL9111-0BA21-0AA0 locking set.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 97
Line-side power components
3.6 Active Interface Modules

Table 3- 28 Technical data for Active Interface Modules, 3 AC 500 V ... 690 V

Order number 6SL3300– 7TG35–8AA0 7TG37–4AA0 7TG41–3AA0 7TG41–3AA0

Suitable for Active Line Module 6SL3330- 7TG35-8AAx 7TG37-4AAx 7TG41-0AAx 7TG41-3AAx
Rated power of kW 560 800 1100 1400
Active Line Module
Rated current A 575 735 1025 1270
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 500 –10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
DC-link capacitance
of the drive line-up, max. µF 59200 153600 153600 153600
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17
- Fan supply, 2 AC 230 V, A 4.6 4.9 4.9 4.9
- Max. precharging current (max. 3 s) A 141 141 141 141
Bypass contactor 2) 3RT1476- 3RT1476- 3WL1212- 3WL1216-
6AP36 6AP36 (3 x) 4BB34-4AN2-Z 4BB34-4AN2-Z
Z=C22 3) Z=C22 3)
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 6.8 9.0 9.2 9.6
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 6.8 9.0 9.2 9.6
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
L1, L2, L3 / U2, V2, W2 M12 M12 M12 M12
PE connection M12 screw M12 screw M12 screw M12 screw
Line/load connection
- Line connection (L1, L2, L3) mm² 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- Load connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- PE connection mm² 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 305 505 505 505
- Height mm 1750 1750 1750 1750
- Depth mm 544 544 544 544
Frame size HI JI JI JI
Weight kg 390 620 620 620
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) Bypass contactor is not included, must be provided separately.
3) The circuit breaker is controlled by the sequential control system of the Active Line Module and must not be switched on
manually. It is therefore recommended that the circuit breaker be equipped with the 3WL9111-0BA21-0AA0 locking set.

Air-cooled chassis power units

98 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Line Modules 4
4.1 Introduction
The drive line-up is connected to the power supply network via the Line Modules.
Line Infeeds comprise a Line Module and the associated line connection and generate a DC
voltage from the connected line voltage that is used to power the connected Motor Modules.
The Line Modules and Interface Modules are suitable for direct operation on TN, IT and TT
systems.

General characteristics of the Line Modules

● Supply voltage:
– 3 AC 380 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) to 3 AC 480 V +10%
– 3 AC 500 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) to 3 AC 690 V +10%
● Line frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
● Suitable for TN, TT, and IT supply systems
● Operating status and error status via LEDs

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 99
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.1 Description
Basic Line Modules are used for the power infeed into the DC link.
They are suitable for applications in which no regenerative energy is produced, or in which
the energy exchange takes place between the motor- and the generator-driven axes in the
DC link.
The DC-link voltage is greater than the rms value of the line rated voltage by a factor of 1.35
(under partial load) or 1.32 (under full load).

Table 4- 1 Overview of Basic Line Modules

Frame size FB Frame sizes GB, GD

Air-cooled chassis power units

100 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Components of the Basic Infeed

A Basic Infeed comprises a Basic Line Module and an external line connection, which
comprises a line filter and a line reactor.

Operating principle
One or more Motor Modules can be connected to the power supply network via the Basic
Line Module. The Basic Line Module provides the DC-link voltage for the Motor Modules.
The Basic Line Module is suitable for direct operation both on TN and on IT and TT systems.

Parallel connection of Basic Line Modules to increase power rating

Up to four Basic Line Modules with the same power rating can be connected in parallel in
order to increase power.
The following rules must be observed when connecting Basic Line Modules in parallel:
● Up to four identical Basic Line Modules can be connected in parallel.
● A common Control Unit is required whenever the modules are connected in parallel.
● With multiple infeeds, power must be supplied to the systems from a common infeed
point (i.e. different supply systems are not permitted).
● A line reactor must be series-connected to every parallel-connected Basic Line Module.
● The upstream line contactors of the individual precharging circuits must switch-on jointly
and simultaneously.
● A derating factor of 7.5% must be taken into consideration, regardless of the number of
modules connected in parallel.
The following rules must be observed when connecting Basic Line Modules of frame size GD
in parallel:
● Each Basic Line Module must be precharged via a separate precharging circuit.
● The circuit breakers of the respective precharging circuits must switch-on jointly and
simultaneously; this can be performed via a monitoring function of the circuit breaker
feedback signals.

Note
Mixed operation is not possible
It is only possible to connect identical power units in parallel if all power units have the same
hardware version. Mixed operation between a power unit with Control Interface Module
(order number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA3) and a power unit with Control Interface Board (order
number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA0) is not possible.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 101
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock and fire hazard caused by overcurrent protective
equipment tripping too late
Overcurrent protective equipment that trips too late or not all can cause electric shock or
fire.
• To protect personnel and for fire protection purposes, at the infeed point, the short-
circuit rating and loop impedance must match the specifications in the documentation for
the installed overcurrent protective equipment to trip within the specified time.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to a high DC-link voltage
As long as the Line Module is connected to the line supply, the DC link is charged with a
high voltage. Contact with components can result in death or serious injury.
• Isolate the Line Module from the line supply during installation of maintenance work, e.g.
via the line contactor or main switch.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to the residual charge of the DC link capacitors
Because of the DC link capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to five minutes
after the power supply has been switched off.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Only open the device after five minutes have elapsed.
• Measure the voltage before starting work on the DCP and DCN DC link terminals.

Air-cooled chassis power units

102 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected against mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected against mechanical damage.

WARNING
Danger of an accident due to missing warning labels in the national language
Missing warning labels in the national language can result in death or serious injury.
• Attach the component warning labels in the national language.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service
lives of Line Modules.
• Observe the ventilation clearances above, below, and in front of the Line Modules,
which are specified in the dimension drawings.

CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
Overheating and a fire can result when the total length of the power cables is exceeded.
• Ensure that the total length of the power cables (motor connection cables and DC link
cables) does not exceed the values specified in the technical data.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 103
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

NOTICE
Material damage caused by loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in faulty electrical connections. This
can cause fire damage or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections with the specified tightening torques, e.g. line supply
connection, motor connection, DC link connections.
• Check the tightening torques of all power connections at regular intervals and tighten
them when required. This applies in particular after transport.

NOTICE
Damage to the devices when performing a voltage test as a result of connections that are
not disconnected
As part of routine tests, SINAMICS S components undergo a voltage test according to EN
61800-5-1. Connected devices can be damaged.
• Disconnect or unplug all SINAMICS devices before the voltage test of the machine
equipment according to EN 60204-1, Section 18.4.

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when DRIVE-CLiQ cables are
used that are either incorrect or have not been released for this purpose.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
particular application.

Air-cooled chassis power units

104 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.3 Interface description

4.2.3.1 Overview

Figure 4-1 Basic Line Module, frame size FB

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 105
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Figure 4-2 Basic Line Module, frame sizes GB, GD

Air-cooled chassis power units

106 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.3.2 Connection example

Figure 4-3 Connection example for Basic Line Module, frame sizes FB, GB

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 107
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Figure 4-4 Connection example, Basic Line Module, frame size GD

NOTICE
Damage to the device due to different phase sequence in the precharging and main circuits
During the brief overlap period where both contactors are simultaneously closed, the
precharging resistors of the Basic Line Module could be overloaded and destroyed due to
different phase sequences in the precharging and main circuits.
• Connect the power cables to the precharging and main circuits with the same phase
sequence.

Air-cooled chassis power units

108 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.3.3 Line/load connection

Table 4- 2 Line/load connection of the Basic Line Module

Terminals Technical specifications

U1, V1, W1 Voltage:
3 AC power input
• 3 AC 380 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10%
• 3 AC 500 V -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10%
Frequency: 47 ... 63 Hz
Connecting thread:
• Frame size FB: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes GB, GD: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
DCPA, DCNA Voltage:
Connection for Braking
• 513 ... 648 VDC
Module
• 675 ... 932 VDC
Connections:
Frame sizes FB, GB, GD: Threaded bolts M6 / 6 Nm for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
DCP, DCN Voltage:
DC power output
• 513 ... 648 VDC
• 675 ... 932 VDC
Connecting thread:
• Frame size FB: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes GB, GD: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
PE connection Connecting thread:
• Frame size FB: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes GB, GD: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)

1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 109
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.3.4 X9 terminal strip

Table 4- 3 Terminal strip X9 for Basic Line Modules, frame sizes FB, GB

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications

1 P24V Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 M Current consumption: Max. 1.1 A
3 Reserved, do not use
4
5 Line contactor control 240 VAC: Max. 8 A
6 30 VDC: Max. 1 A
isolated
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm2

Table 4- 4 Terminal strip X9 for Basic Line Modules, frame size GD

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications

1 P24V Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 M Current consumption: Max. 1.1 A

3 Line contactor control 240 VAC: Max. 8 A

4 30 VDC: Max. 1 A
isolated
5 Precharge contactor control 240 VAC: Max. 8 A
6 30 VDC: Max. 1 A
isolated
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm2

NOTICE
Damage to the device due to incorrect connection of terminal strip X9
If the connections for the "Line contactor control" and the "Precharging contactor control"
are swapped, the device can be destroyed when it is switched on.
• Note the different connection assignments for terminal strip X9 for the various modules.

Air-cooled chassis power units

110 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

Table 4- 5 Terminal strip X41

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 EP M1 (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Current consumption: 10 mA
3 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC
4 + Temp
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm2

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Only use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety
isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

NOTICE
Device failure as a result of unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors
Unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors can result in interference
being coupled into the signal processing electronics from the power side. This can result in
significant disturbance of all signals (fault messages) up to failure of individual components
(destruction of the devices).
• Only use shielded cables as temperature sensor cables.
• If temperature sensor cables are routed together with the motor cable, use separately
shielded cables twisted in pairs.
• Connect the cable shield to ground potential through a large surface area.
• Recommendation: Use suitable Motion Connect cables.

NOTICE
Risk of motor overheating due to incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats.
• Make sure that you connect the KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 111
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Note
The temperature sensor connection can be used for motors that are equipped with a KTY84-
1C130 or PTC probe in the stator windings.

Note
Connection to terminals 1 and 2
For operation, 24 VDC must be connected to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1. Pulse
suppression is activated when removed.

4.2.3.6 X42 terminal strip

Table 4- 6 Terminal strip X42 voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and Terminal Module

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 P24L Voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and
2 Terminal Module (18 to 28.8 V)
maximum load current: 3 A
3 M
4
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm2

Note
Connection options for terminal strip X42
The terminal strip is not intended for free 24 VDC availability (for example for supplying
further line-side components), as the voltage supply of the Control Interface Module could
also be overloaded and operating capability could thus be compromised.

Air-cooled chassis power units

112 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

Table 4- 7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

PIN Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) 24 V power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (50 pcs.) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 113
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.3.8 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module

Table 4- 8 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module

LED state Description

READY DC LINK
Off Off The electronics power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green Off The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC-link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC-link voltage is too high.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red --- At least one fault is present in this component.
Note:
LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured.
Flashing light --- Firmware is being downloaded.
0.5 Hz:
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON.
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / Note:
orange The two options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0124
or = 1.
red / orange

Table 4- 9 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module

LED Color Status Description

POWER OK Green Off DC-link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On The component is ready for operation.
Flashing There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
light POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.

WARNING
Danger to life when live parts of the DC link are touched
Irrespective of the state of the LED "DC LINK", hazardous DC-link voltages can always be
present.
• Observe the warning information on the component.

Air-cooled chassis power units

114 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.4 Dimension drawing

Dimension drawing, frame size FB

The mandatory ventilation clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-5 Dimension drawing, Basic Line Module, frame sizes FB, side view, front view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 115
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Dimension drawing, frame sizes GB, GD

The mandatory ventilation clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-6 Dimension drawing, Basic Line Module, frame sizes GB, GD. Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

116 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.5 Electrical connection

Operating a Basic Line Module on a non-grounded line supply (IT system)

When the Basic Line Module is operated on an ungrounded line supply (IT system), the
integrated basic interference suppression modules must be deactivated by screwing out a
connection clip.

Note
Warning label on the connection clip
A yellow warning label is attached to each connection clip so that it is easier to find.
• The warning label must be removed from the connection clip (by pulling it off) if the
connection clip is to remain in the unit (operation on a grounded line supply).
• The warning label must be removed together with the connection clip if the unit is
operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system).

Figure 4-7 Warning label on the connection clip

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 117
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Figure 4-8 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Basic
Line Module, frame size FB

Air-cooled chassis power units

118 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Figure 4-9 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Basic
Line Module, frame sizes GB, GD

NOTICE
Damage to the device through not removing the connection clip with a non-grounded line
supply
Failure to remove the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module on an
ungrounded line supply (IT system) can cause significant damage to the device.
• With a non-grounded line supply (IT system), remove the connection clip to the basic
interference suppression module.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 119
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Adjusting the fan voltage (-T10)

The power supply for the device fans (1 AC 230 V) in the Basic Line Module (-T10) is taken
from the line supply using transformers. The installation position of the transformers is
indicated in the interface descriptions.
The transformers are fitted with primary taps so that they can be fine-tuned to the line supply
voltage.
If necessary, the connection fitted in the factory, shown with a dashed line, must be
reconnected to the actual line voltage.

Figure 4-10 Setting terminals for the fan transformers (3 AC 380 to 480 V / 3 AC 500 to 690 V

The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer
are indicated in the following tables (factory presetting: 480 V / 0 V or 690 V / 0 V).

Note
With the 3 AC 500 V to 690 V fan transformer, a jumper is inserted between the "600 V"
terminal and "CON" terminal. The "600 V" and "CON" terminals are reserved for internal use.

WARNING
Danger of fire due to overheating resulting from insufficient device fan voltage
If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual line voltage, overheating and human
danger due to smoke and fire may result.
This can also cause the fan fuses to blow due to overload.
• Set the terminals in accordance with the actual line voltage.

Air-cooled chassis power units

120 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Table 4- 10 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer (3 AC 380 ... 480 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

380 V ± 10% 380 V
400 V ± 10% 400 V
440 V ± 10% 440 V
480 V ± 10% 480 V

Table 4- 11 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer (3 AC 500 ... 690 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

500 V ± 10% 500 V
525 V ± 10% 525 V
575 V ± 10% 575 V
600 V ± 10% 600 V
660 V ± 10% 660 V
690 V ± 10% 690 V

4.2.6 Precharging circuit for the Basic Line Modules, frame size GD

Description
When switching on, the precharging circuit ensures that the DC-link capacitors of the Basic
Line Module and the connected Motor Modules are precharged with current limiting.
After precharging has been completed, the circuit breaker is closed and the precharging
circuit bypassed; the Basic Line Module is then directly connected to the line supply.
The precharging circuit comprises a precharging contactor and precharging resistors; the
circuit must be protected against overcurrent using suitable protection measures.
To increase the permissible DC-link capacitance, the precharging resistors can also be
connected in parallel in each phase.

NOTICE
Damage to the units if the precharging circuit is faulty
When it is switched on, the Basic Line Module can be destroyed if the precharging circuit is
not correctly implemented.
• For Basic Line Modules, frame size GD, the precharging input circuit must be
implemented according to the following circuit and the notes for dimensioning the
various components.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 121
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Figure 4-11 Connection example, Basic Line Module, frame size GD

Precharging contactor
The precharging contactor must be able to conduct the maximum precharging current for
approx. 1 second (see the technical data).
To protect against overvoltage when opening, the contactor should be equipped with a
varistor, corresponding to the manufacturer's recommendations.
The precharging contactor is controlled via terminal -X9: 5, 6 of the Basic Line Module.
In a version with one precharging resistor for each phase, a contactor of the Sirius 3RT1034
series is recommended.
In a version with two precharging resistors connected in parallel for each phase, a contactor
of the Sirius 3RT1044 series is recommended.

Air-cooled chassis power units

122 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Precharging resistors
The precharging resistors are used to limit the current while precharging.

Table 4- 12 Technical data for the precharging resistors

Category Unit 3 AC 380 ... 480 V 3 AC 500 ... 690 V

Rated voltage V 690 VAC 690 VAC
Frequency Hz 47 ... 63 47 ... 63
Resistance value Ω 2.2 ±10% 4.0 ±10%
Pulse loading capability 1) Ws 18000 18000
Precharging current 2)
- one resistor per phase A 91 86
- two resistors per phase A 182 172
Ambient temperature °C 60 60
Order number 6SL3000-0KE12-2AA0 6SL3000-0KH14-0AA0
1) The pulse load is present for a minimum of 1 second, followed by a pause of 175 seconds.
2) Line current present at the start of the precharging (initial rms value)

As the precharging resistors can get hot, sufficient cooling and clearance to adjacent
components must be ensured in operation.

Fuses
The precharging circuit components are protected against overload using fuses.
In a version with one precharging resistor for each phase, fuses of the 3NE1 817-0 (50 A)
type are recommended.
In a version with two precharging resistors connected in parallel for each phase, fuses of the
3NE1 021-0 (100 A) type are recommended.

Circuit breaker
The circuit breaker is used to connect to the line supply.
A 3WL1220 circuit breaker is recommended.
The circuit breaker is controlled via terminal -X9: 3, 4 of the Basic Line Module.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 123
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

4.2.7 Technical data

Table 4- 13 Technical data for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3330– 1TE34–2AA3 1TE35–3AA3 1TE38–2AA3 1TE41–2AA3

Rated output
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 200 250 400 560
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 160 200 315 450
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 305 385 615 860
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 245 305 485 690
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 420 530 820 1200
- Base load current IH_DC A 328 413 640 936
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 630 795 1230 1800
Input current
- Rated current In_E A 365 460 710 1010
- Maximum current Imax_E A 547 690 1065 1515
- Maximum precharging current (max. 3 s) A internal internal internal internal
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.35 x Uline (partial load) / 1.32 x Uline (full load)
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
- Fan power consumption (230 VAC) A 1.1 1.1 1.1 4.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance
- Basic Line Module µF 7200 9600 14600 23200
- Drive line-up, max. µF 57600 76800 116800 185600
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 1.9 2.1 3.2 4.6
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 1.9 2.1 3.2 4.6
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.36
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 66 / 68 66 / 68 66 / 68 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M10 M10 M10 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 6 x 185
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 6 x 185
- PE connection mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 2600 2600 2600 4000
- Unshielded m 3900 3900 3900 6000

Air-cooled chassis power units

124 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 1TE34–2AA3 1TE35–3AA3 1TE38–2AA3 1TE41–2AA3

Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 310 310 310 310
- Height mm 1164 1164 1164 1653
- Depth mm 352 352 352 550
Frame size FB FB FB GB
Weight kg 96 96 96 214
Recommended fuse 2) 3NE1333-2 3NE1334-2 3NE1438-2 3NE1435-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 1 2
- Rated current 450 500 800 560
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 2 3 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 3) A 4400 5200 10000 12400
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
3) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 125
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Table 4- 14 Technical data for Basic Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3330– 1TE41–5AA3 1TE41–8AA3

Rated output
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 710 900
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 560 705
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 1090 1390
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 860 1090
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 1500 1880
- Base load current IH_DC A 1170 1467
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 2250 2820
Input current
- Rated current In_E A 1265 1630
- Maximum current Imax_E A 1897 2380
- Maximum precharging current (max. 3 s) A internal 308
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.35 x Uline (partial load) / 1.32 x Uline (full load)
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.1 1.1
- Fan power consumption (230 VAC) A 4.5 4.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55
DC-link capacitance
- Basic Line Module µF 29000 34800
- Drive line-up, max. µF 232000 139200/
278400 4)
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 5.5 6.9
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 5.5 6.9
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 73 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M12 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 6 x 185 6 x 185
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 6 x 185 6 x 185
- PE connection mm² 4 x 240 4 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 4000 4800
- Unshielded m 6000 7200
Degree of protection IP00 IP00

Air-cooled chassis power units

126 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 1TE41–5AA3 1TE41–8AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 310 310
- Height mm 1653 1653
- Depth mm 550 550
Frame size GB GD
Weight kg 214 214
Recommended fuse 2) 3NE1437-2 3NE1435-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2 3
- Rated current 710 560
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 3) A 18400 18600
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
3) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.
4) The first value applies for one precharging resistor for each phase, the second value for two precharging resistors
connected in parallel for each phase

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 127
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Table 4- 15 Technical data for Basic Line Modules, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC, Part 1

Order number 6SL3330– 1TG33–0AA3 1TG34–3AA3 1TG36–8AA3 1TG41–1AA3

Rated power
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 250 355 560 900
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 195 280 440 710
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 175 250 390 635
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 165 235 365 595
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 250 350 600 900
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 200 300 450 800
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 300 430 680 1100
- Base load current IH_DC A 234 335 530 858
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 450 645 1020 1650
Input current
- Rated current In_E A 260 375 575 925
- Maximum current Imax_E A 390 563 863 1388
- Maximum precharging current (max. 3 s) A internal internal internal internal
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.35 x Uline (partial load) / 1.32 x Uline (full load)
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
- Fan power consumption (230 VAC) A 1.1 1.1 1.1 4.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance
- Basic Line Module µF 3200 4800 7300 11600
- Drive line-up, max. µF 25600 38400 58400 92800
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 1.5 2.1 3.0 5.4
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 1.5 2.1 3.0 5.4
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.36
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 66 / 68 66 / 68 66 / 68 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M10 M10 M10 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 6 x 185
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 6 x 185
- PE connection mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 1500 1500 1500 2250
- Unshielded m 2250 2250 2250 3375
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00

Air-cooled chassis power units

128 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 1TG33–0AA3 1TG34–3AA3 1TG36–8AA3 1TG41–1AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 310 310 310 310
- Height mm 1164 1164 1164 1653
- Depth mm 352 352 352 550
Frame size FB FB FB GB
Weight kg 96 96 96 214
Recommended fuse 2) 3NE1230-2 3NE1333-2 3NE1436-2 3NE1334-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 1 2
- Rated current 315 450 630 500
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 2 2 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 3) A 3000 4400 8000 10400
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
3) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 129
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Table 4- 16 Technical data for Basic Line Modules, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC, Part 2

Order number 6SL3330– 1TG41–4AA3 1TG41–8AA3

Rated power
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 1100 1500
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 910 1220
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 810 1085
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 755 1015
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 1250 1500
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 1000 1250
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 1400 1880
- Base load current IH_DC A 1092 1467
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 2100 2820
Input current
- Rated current In_E A 1180 1580
- Maximum current Imax_E A 1770 2370
- Maximum precharging current (max. 3 s) A internal 234
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Fan supply voltage VAC 230 (195.5 ... 264.5)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.35 x Uline (partial load) / 1.32 x Uline (full load)
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.1 1.1
- Fan power consumption (230 VAC) A 4.5 4.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55
DC-link capacitance
- Basic Line Module µF 15470 19500
- Drive line-up, max. µF 123760 78000/156000
4)

Power loss, max. 1)

- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 5.8 7.3

- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 5.8 7.3
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 73 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M12 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 6 x 185 6 x 185
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 6 x 185 6 x 185
- PE connection mm² 4 x 240 4 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 2250 2750
- Unshielded m 3375 4125
Degree of protection IP00 IP00

Air-cooled chassis power units

130 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 1TG41–4AA3 1TG41–8AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 310 310
- Height mm 1653 1653
- Depth mm 550 550
Frame size GB GD
Weight kg 214 214
Recommended fuse 2) 3NE1436-2 3NE1435-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2 3
- Rated current 630 560
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 3) A 16000 18600
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
3) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.
4) The first value applies for one precharging resistor for each phase, the second value for two precharging resistors
connected in parallel for each phase

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 131
Line Modules
4.2 Basic Line Modules

Overload capability
The Basic Line Modules have an overload reserve.
The criterion for overload is that the Basic Line Module is operated with its base load current
before and after the overload occurs (a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis here).

High overload
The base load current for a high overload IH_DC is based on a duty cycle of 150% for 60 s; the
max. current Imax_DC can flow for 5 s.

Figure 4-12 High overload

Air-cooled chassis power units

132 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.1 Description
Smart Line Modules are infeed/regenerative feedback units. Like the Basic Line Module,
they supply energy to the connected Motor Modules, but unlike the Basic Line Module, they
can feed back regenerative energy.
The infeed occurs over a diode jumper, while stable, line-commutated regenerative feedback
takes place via IGBTs with 100% continuous energy regeneration.
The DC-link voltage is greater than the rms value of the line rated voltage by a factor of 1.32
(under partial load) or 1.30 (under full load).

Table 4- 17 Overview of Smart Line Modules

Frame size GX Frame size HX Frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 133
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Components of the Smart Infeed

A Smart Infeed comprises a Smart Line Module and an external line connection, which
comprises bypass contactor, precharging input circuit, fuse, and line reactor.

Figure 4-13 Overview of Smart Infeed

Operating principle
One or more Motor Modules can be connected to the power supply network via the Smart
Line Module. The Smart Line Module provides the DC-link voltage for the Motor Modules.
The regenerative feedback capability of the Smart Line Module can be deactivated by
parameterization.
The Smart Line Module is suitable for direct operation both on TN and on IT and TT
systems.
In generator mode, the Smart Line Module feeds regenerative energy into the supply
network. An integrated Voltage Sensing Module 10 (VSM10) is used for sensing the line
voltage for regenerative feedback
The Smart Line Module is used for:
● Machines with medium dynamic requirements
● Infrequent braking cycles and high braking energy

Air-cooled chassis power units

134 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Parallel connection of Smart Line Modules to increase power rating

Up to four Smart Line Modules with the same power rating can be connected in parallel in
order to increase power.
The following rules must be observed when connecting Smart Line Modules in parallel:
● Up to four identical Smart Line Modules can be connected in parallel.
● A common Control Unit is required whenever the modules are connected in parallel.
● With multiple infeeds, power must be supplied to the systems from a common infeed
point (i.e. different supply systems are not permitted).
● A line reactor must be series-connected to every parallel-connected Smart Line Module.
● A derating factor of 7.5% must be taken into consideration, regardless of the number of
modules connected in parallel.

Note
Mixed operation is not possible
It is only possible to connect identical power units in parallel if all power units have the same
hardware version. Mixed operation between a power unit with Control Interface Module
(order number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA3) and a power unit with Control Interface Board (order
number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA0) is not possible.

NOTICE
Converter error due to missing circuit breaker wiring
If the leading contact of the circuit breaker is not wired to the OFF2 signal from the Control
Unit, the SINAMICS control reacts with the "Overvoltage" or "Undervoltage" error if the
circuit breaker is triggered.
• Connect the signal from the leading contact of the circuit breaker to the OFF2 signal
from the Control Unit. In this way, the SINAMICS control is able to delete pulses from
the Smart Line Modules in good time, before the circuit breaker is opened.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 135
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock and fire hazard caused by overcurrent protective
equipment tripping too late
Overcurrent protective equipment that trips too late or not all can cause electric shock or
fire.
• To protect personnel and for fire protection purposes, at the infeed point, the short-
circuit rating and loop impedance must match the specifications in the documentation for
the installed overcurrent protective equipment to trip within the specified time.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to a high DC-link voltage
As long as the Line Module is connected to the line supply, the DC link is charged with a
high voltage. Contact with components can result in death or serious injury.
• Isolate the Line Module from the line supply during installation of maintenance work, e.g.
via the line contactor or main switch.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to the residual charge of the DC link capacitors
Because of the DC link capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to five minutes
after the power supply has been switched off.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Only open the device after five minutes have elapsed.
• Measure the voltage before starting work on the DCP and DCN DC link terminals.

Air-cooled chassis power units

136 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected from mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected from mechanical damage.

WARNING
Danger of an accident due to missing warning labels in the national language
Missing warning labels in the national language can result in death or serious injury.
• Attach the component warning labels in the national language.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service
lives of Line Modules.
• Observe the ventilation clearances above, below, and in front of the Line Modules,
which are specified in the dimension drawings.

CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
Overheating and a fire can result when the total length of the power cables is exceeded.
• Ensure that the total length of the power cables (motor connection cables and DC link
cables) does not exceed the values specified in the technical data.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 137
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

NOTICE
Material damage caused by the failure to remove linkage levers for devices of frame sizes
HX and JX
The failure to remove linkage levers from devices of frame sizes HX and JX can cause
damage to the device as a result of undershooting the necessary voltage clearances.
• For devices of frame sizes HX and JX, remove the linkage levers marked in red once
the devices have been installed.

NOTICE
Material damage caused by loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in faulty electrical connections. This
can cause fire damage or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections with the specified tightening torques, e.g. line supply
connection, motor connection, DC link connections.
• Check the tightening torques of all power connections at regular intervals and tighten
them when required. This applies in particular after transport.

NOTICE
Damage to the devices when performing a voltage test as a result of connections that are
not disconnected
As part of routine tests, SINAMICS S components undergo a voltage test according to
EN 61800-5-1. Connected devices can be damaged.
• Disconnect or unplug all SINAMICS devices before the voltage test of the machine
equipment according to EN 60204-1, Section 18.4.

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when DRIVE-CLiQ cables are
used that are either incorrect or have not been released for this purpose.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
particular application.

Note
Operation on line supplies where energy recovery is not possible
In line supply systems without energy recovery capability (e.g. a diesel generator), device
faults can occur as the braking energy cannot be dissipated.
• For line supplies without regenerative feedback capability (e.g. diesel generator),
deactivate the regenerative feedback capability of the Line Modules using the appropriate
parameter (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual).
• The braking energy must then be dissipated via an additional Braking Module with
braking resistor in the drive line-up.

Air-cooled chassis power units

138 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.3 Interface description

4.3.3.1 Overview

Figure 4-14 Smart Line Module, frame size GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 139
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Figure 4-15 Smart Line Module, frame size HX

Air-cooled chassis power units

140 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Figure 4-16 Smart Line Module, frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 141
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.3.2 Connection example

Figure 4-17 Smart Line Module wiring diagram

Air-cooled chassis power units

142 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

NOTICE
Damage to the device due to different phase sequence in the precharging and main circuits
If the precharging and main circuits have different phase sequences, the precharging
resistors could be overloaded and destroyed during the brief overlap period where both
contactors are simultaneously closed.
• Wire the precharging and main circuits with the same phase sequence.

4.3.3.3 Line/load connection

Table 4- 18 Line/load connection of the Smart Line Module

Terminals Technical specifications

U1, V1, W1 Voltage:
3 AC power input
• 3 AC 380 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10 %
• 3 AC 500 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10 %
Frequency: 47 ... 63 Hz
Connecting thread:
• Frame size GX: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
DCPA, DCNA Voltage:
Connection for Braking
• 500 ... 630 V DC
Module
• 650 ... 900 V DC
Connections:
• Frame size GX: Threaded bolts M6 / 6 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: Connection for connection clip
DCP, DCN Voltage:
DC power output
• 500 ... 630 V DC
• 650 ... 900 V DC
Connections:
• Frame size GX: Thread M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: d = 12 mm (M12/50 Nm) flat connector for busbar
PE connection Connecting thread:
PE1, PE2
• Frame size GX: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)

1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 143
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.3.4 X9 terminal strip

Table 4- 19 Terminal strip X9

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications

1 P24V Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 M Current consumption: max. 1.7 A
3 Bypass contactor control 240 V AC: 8 A max.
4 24 VDC: max. 1 A
isolated
5 Not assigned
6
7 Checkback signal pre-charge Voltage: 230 VAC
8 contactor Maximum permissible current: 6 A
isolated
• Contact closed: Contactor is de-energized
• Contact open: Contactor is energized
L1 Connection of precharging 3 AC 380 ... 3 AC 480 V or
L2 circuit and fan supply 3 AC 500 ... 3 AC 690 V
Current consumption: See Technical data
L3

Max. connectable cross-section: Terminals 1 ... 8: 2.5 mm2, Terminals L1 ... L3: 16 mm2

4.3.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

Table 4- 20 Terminal strip X41

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 EP M1 (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Current consumption: 10 mA
3 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC
4 + Temp
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm2

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Only use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety
isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

Air-cooled chassis power units

144 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

NOTICE
Device failure as a result of unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors
Unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors can result in interference
being coupled into the signal processing electronics from the power side. This can result in
significant disturbance of all signals (fault messages) up to failure of individual components
(destruction of the devices).
• Only use shielded cables as temperature sensor cables.
• If temperature sensor cables are routed together with the motor cable, use separately
shielded cables twisted in pairs.
• Connect the cable shield to ground potential through a large surface area.
• Recommendation: Use suitable Motion Connect cables.

NOTICE
Risk of motor overheating due to incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats.
• Make sure that you connect the KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Note
The temperature sensor connection can be used for motors that are equipped with a KTY84-
1C130 or PTC probe in the stator windings.

Note
Connection to terminals 1 and 2
For operation, 24 VDC must be connected to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1. Pulse
suppression is activated when removed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 145
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.3.6 X42 terminal strip

Table 4- 21 Terminal strip X42 voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and Terminal Module

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 P24L Voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and
2 Terminal Module (18 to 28.8 V)
maximum load current: 3 A
3 M
4
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm2

Note
Connection options for terminal strip X42
The terminal strip is not intended for free 24 VDC availability (for example for supplying
further line-side components), as the voltage supply of the Control Interface Module could
also be overloaded and operating capability could thus be compromised.

4.3.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

Table 4- 22 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

PIN Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) 24 V power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (50 pcs.) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Air-cooled chassis power units

146 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.3.8 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module

Table 4- 23 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module

LED state Description

READY DC LINK
Off Off The electronics power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green Off The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place. The DC-link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place. The DC-link voltage is too high.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red --- At least one fault is present in this component.
Note:
LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured.
Flashing light --- Firmware is being downloaded.
0.5 Hz:
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON.
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / Note:
orange The two options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0124
or = 1.
red / orange

Table 4- 24 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module

LED Color Status Description

POWER OK Green Off DC-link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On The component is ready for operation.
Flashing There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
light POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.

WARNING
Danger to life when live parts of the DC link are touched
Irrespective of the state of the LED "DC LINK", hazardous DC-link voltages can always be
present.
• Observe the warning information on the component.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 147
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.4 Dimension drawing

Dimension drawing, frame size GX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-18 Dimension drawing Smart Line Module, frame size GX Front view, side view

Air-cooled chassis power units

148 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size HX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-19 Dimension drawing Smart Line Module, frame size HX Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 149
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size JX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-20 Dimension drawing Smart Line Module, frame size JX Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

150 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.5 Electrical connection

Operating a Smart Line Module on a non-grounded line supply (IT system)

When the device is operated on an ungrounded line supply (IT system), the integrated basic
interference suppression modules must be deactivated by screwing out a connection clip.

Note
Warning label on the connection clip
A yellow warning label is attached to each connection clip so that it is easier to find.
• The warning label must be removed from the connection clip (by pulling it off) if the
connection clip is to remain in the unit (operation on a grounded line supply).
• The warning label must be removed together with the connection clip if the unit is
operated on a non-grounded line supply (IT system).

Figure 4-21 Warning label on the connection clip

With frame sizes HX and JX, you must remove the left-hand fan before removing the
connection clip (see "Replacing components").

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 151
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Figure 4-22 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Smart
Line Module for frame size GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

152 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Figure 4-23 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Smart
Line Module for frame size HX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 153
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Figure 4-24 Removing the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module in the Smart Line Module for
frame size JX

NOTICE
Damage to the device through not removing the connection clip with a non-grounded line
supply
Failure to remove the connection clip to the basic interference suppression module on a
non-grounded line supply (IT system) can cause significant damage to the device.
• With a non-grounded line supply (IT system), remove the connection clip to the basic
interference suppression module.

Removing the connector jumper on the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module

When operating the Smart Line Module on an ungrounded line supply (IT system), at the
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10), remove the connector jumper in terminal X530 at the
lower side of the component.
Use two screwdrivers or another suitable tool to relieve the holding springs in the terminal
and then withdraw the connector jumper.

Air-cooled chassis power units

154 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Terminal X530 with connector jumper Relieve the springs and withdraw the connector
jumper

Adjusting the fan voltage (-T10)

The power supply for the device fans (1 AC 230 V) in the Smart Line Module (-T10) is taken
from the line supply using transformers. The installation position of the transformers is
indicated in the interface descriptions.
The transformers are fitted with primary taps so that they can be fine-tuned to the line supply
voltage.
If necessary, the connection fitted in the factory, shown with a dashed line, must be
reconnected to the actual line voltage.

Note
Two transformers (–T10 and –T20) are installed in Smart Line Modules, frame size JX. The
two primary-side terminals on each of these devices must be adjusted together.

Figure 4-25 Setting terminals for the fan transformers (3 AC 380 to 480 V / 3 AC 500 to 690 V

The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer
are indicated in the following tables (factory presetting: 480 V / 0 V or 690 V / 0 V).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 155
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Note
With the 3 AC 500 V to 690 V fan transformer, a jumper is inserted between the "600 V"
terminal and "CON" terminal. The jumper between terminal "600 V" and "CON" is for internal
use.

WARNING
Danger of fire due to overheating resulting from insufficient device fan voltage
If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual line voltage, overheating and human
danger due to smoke and fire may result.
This can also cause the fan fuses to blow due to overload.
• Set the terminals in accordance with the actual line voltage.

Table 4- 25 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer (3 AC 380 ... 480 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

380 V ± 10% 380 V
400 V ± 10% 400 V
440 V ± 10% 440 V
480 V ± 10% 480 V

Table 4- 26 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer (3 AC 500 ... 690 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

500 V ± 10% 500 V
525 V ± 10% 525 V
575 V ± 10% 575 V
600 V ± 10% 600 V
660 V ± 10% 660 V
690 V ± 10% 690 V

Air-cooled chassis power units

156 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

4.3.6 Technical data

Table 4- 27 Technical data for Smart Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3330– 6TE35–5AA3 6TE37–3AA3 6TE41–1AA3 6TE41–3AA3

Rated output
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 250 355 500 630
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 235 315 450 555
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 385 545 770 970
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 360 485 695 855
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 550 730 1050 1300
- Base load current IH_DC A 490 650 934 1157
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 825 1095 1575 1950
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Rated current In_E A 463 614 883 1093
- Maximum current Imax_E A 694 921 1324 1639
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.32 x Uline (partial load) / 1.30 x Uline (full load)
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.35 1.35 1.4 1.5
- Fan power consumption (at 400 VAC) A 1.8 1.8 3.6 5.4
Max. precharging current (max. 3 s) A 33 33 98 98
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance
- Smart Line Module µF 8400 12000 16800 18900
- Drive line-up, max. µF 42000 60000 67200 75600
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 3.7 4.7 7.1 11.0
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 3.7 4.7 7.1 11.0
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.36 0.36 0.78 1.08
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 69 / 73 69 / 73 70 / 73 70 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M10 M10 M12 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 Busbar Busbar
- PE connection PE1 mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² - - 2 x 240 3 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 4000 4000 4800 4800
- Unshielded m 6000 6000 7200 7200
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 157
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 6TE35–5AA3 6TE37–3AA3 6TE41–1AA3 6TE41–3AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 310 310 503 704
- Height mm 1420 1420 1475 1480
- Depth mm 550 550 550 550
Frame size GX GX HX JX
Weight, approx. kg 150 150 294 458
Recommended fuse 2) 3NE1435-2 3NE1437-2 3NE1334-2 3NE1436-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 2 2
- Rated current 560 710 500 630
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 3 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 3) A 6200 9200 10400 16000
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
3) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

158 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Table 4- 28 Technical data for Smart Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3330– 6TE41–7AA3

Rated output
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 800
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 730
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 1230
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 1125
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 1700
- Base load current IH_DC A 1513
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 2550
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Rated current In_E A 1430
- Maximum current Imax_E A 2145
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.32 x Uline (partial load) / 1.30 x Uline (full load)
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.7
- Fan power consumption (at 400 VAC) A 5.4
Max. precharging current (max. 3 s) A 98
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40
- With derating °C 55
DC-link capacitance
- Smart Line Module µF 28800
- Drive line-up, max. µF 115200
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 11.5
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 11.5
Cooling air requirement m3/s 1.08
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 70 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 6 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar
- PE connection PE1 mm² 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 3 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 4800
- Unshielded m 7200
Degree of protection IP00

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 159
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 6TE41–7AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 704
- Height mm 1480
- Depth mm 550
Frame size JX
Weight, approx. kg 458
Recommended fuse 2) 3NE1448-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2
- Rated current 850
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3
Minimum short-circuit current 3) A 21000
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
3) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

160 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Table 4- 29 Technical data for Smart Line Modules, 3 AC 500 to 690 V

Order number 6SL3330– 6TG35–5AA3 6TG38–8AA3 6TG41–2AA3 6TG41–7AA3

Rated power
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 450 710 1000 1400
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 405 665 885 1255
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 320 525 705 995
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 295 480 640 910
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 500 790 1115 1465
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 450 740 990 1400
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 550 900 1200 1700
- Base load current IH_DC A 490 800 1068 1513
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 825 1350 1800 2550
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Rated current In_E A 463 757 1009 1430
- Maximum current Imax_E A 694 1135 1513 2145
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3 AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.32 x Uline (partial load) / 1.30 x Uline (full load)
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.35 1.4 1.5 1.7
- Fan power consumption A 1.4 / 1.0 2.9 / 2.1 4.3 / 3.1 4.3 / 3.1
(at 500 VAC / 690 VAC)
Max. precharging current (max. 3 s) A 41 122 122 122
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance
- Smart Line Module µF 5600 7400 11100 14400
- Drive line-up, max. µF 28000 29600 44400 57600
Power loss, max. 1)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 4.3 6.5 12.0 13.8
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 4.3 6.5 12.0 13.8
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.36 0.78 1.08 1.08
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 69 / 73 70 / 73 70 / 73 70 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M10 M12 M12 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 240 Busbar Busbar Busbar
- PE connection PE1 mm² 2 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² - 2 x 240 3 x 240 3 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 2250 2750 2750 2750
- Unshielded m 3375 4125 4125 4125
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 161
Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 6TG35–5AA3 6TG38–8AA3 6TG41–2AA3 6TG41–7AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 310 503 704 704
- Height mm 1420 1475 1480 1480
- Depth mm 550 550 550 550
Frame size GX HX JX JX
Weight, approx. kg 150 294 458 458
Recommended fuse 2) 3NE1435-2 3NE1448-2 3NE1435-2 3NE1448-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 2 2
- Rated current 560 850 560 850
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 3 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 3) A 6200 10500 12400 21000
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
3) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

162 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.3 Smart Line Modules

Overload capability
The Smart Line Modules have an overload reserve.
The criterion for overload is that the Smart Line Module is operated with its base load current
before and after the overload occurs (a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis here).

High overload
The base load current for a high overload IH_DC is based on a duty cycle of 150% for 60 s; the
max. current Imax_DC can flow for 5 s.

Figure 4-26 High overload

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 163
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.1 Description
The self-commutating infeed / regenerative feedback units act as step-up converters and
generate a stabilized DC-link voltage that is 1.5x greater than the rated line supply voltage.
In this way, the connected Motor Modules are isolated from the line voltage. This improves
the dynamic response and control quality because line tolerances and fluctuations do not
affect the motor voltage.
If required, the Active Line Modules can also provide reactive power compensation.

Table 4- 30 Overview of Active Line Modules

Frame size FX Frame size GX Frame size HX Frame size JX

Active Infeed components

An Active Infeed comprises an Active Interface Module and an Active Line Module.
The bypass contactor is fitted in the relevant Active Interface Module on Active Infeeds which
feature an Active Line Module of frame size FX or GX. The Active Interface Modules and
Active Line Modules of these frame sizes have degree of protection IP20.

Air-cooled chassis power units

164 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Figure 4-27 Overview of Active Infeed (frame sizes FI/FX and GI/GX)

In the case of an Active Infeed with an Active Line Module of frame sizes HX or JX, the
bypass contactor is not included in the associated Active Interface Module, but must be
provided separately. The Active Interface Modules and Active Line Modules of these frame
sizes have degree of protection IP00.

Figure 4-28 Overview of Active Infeed (frame sizes HI/HX and JI/JX)

Operating principle
One or more Motor Modules can be connected to the power supply network via the Active
Line Module. The Active Line Module provides a constant DC-link voltage for the Motor
Modules. This ensures that they are not influenced by line voltage fluctuations. The
regenerative feedback capability of the Active Line Module can be deactivated by
parameterization.
The Active Line Module is suitable for direct operation both on TN and on IT and TT
systems.
With the motors operating as generators, the Active Line Module feeds regenerative energy
into the supply network.
The Active Line Module is used for:
● Machines with high dynamic drive requirements
● Frequent braking cycles and high braking energy

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 165
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Parallel connection of Active Line Modules to increase power rating

Up to four Active Line Modules with the same power rating can be connected in parallel in
order to increase power.
The following rules must be observed when connecting Active Line Modules in parallel:
● Up to four identical Active Line Modules can be connected in parallel.
● A common Control Unit is required whenever the modules are connected in parallel.
● With multiple infeeds, power must be supplied to the systems from a common infeed
point (i.e. different supply systems are not permitted).
● A derating factor of 5% must be taken into consideration, regardless of the number of
modules connected in parallel.

Note
Mixed operation is not possible
It is only possible to connect identical power units in parallel if all power units have the same
hardware version. Mixed operation between a power unit with Control Interface Module
(order number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA3) and a power unit with Control Interface Board (order
number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA0) is not possible.

Air-cooled chassis power units

166 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock and fire hazard caused by overcurrent protective
equipment tripping too late
Overcurrent protective equipment that trips too late or not all can cause electric shock or
fire.
• To protect personnel and for fire protection purposes, at the infeed point, the short-
circuit rating and loop impedance must match the specifications in the documentation for
the installed overcurrent protective equipment to trip within the specified time.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to a high DC-link voltage
As long as the Line Module is connected to the line supply, the DC link is charged with a
high voltage. Contact with components can result in death or serious injury.
• Isolate the Line Module from the line supply during installation of maintenance work, e.g.
via the line contactor or main switch.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to the residual charge of the DC link capacitors
Because of the DC link capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to five minutes
after the power supply has been switched off.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Only open the device after five minutes have elapsed.
• Measure the voltage before starting work on the DCP and DCN DC link terminals.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 167
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected from mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected from mechanical damage.

WARNING
Danger of an accident due to missing warning labels in the national language
Missing warning labels in the national language can result in death or serious injury.
• Attach the component warning labels in the national language.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service
lives of Line Modules.
• Observe the ventilation clearances above, below, and in front of the Line Modules,
which are specified in the dimension drawings.

CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
Overheating and a fire can result when the total length of the power cables is exceeded.
• Ensure that the total length of the power cables (motor connection cables and DC link
cables) does not exceed the values specified in the technical data.

Air-cooled chassis power units

168 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

NOTICE
Material damage caused by the failure to remove linkage levers for devices of frame sizes
HX and JX
The failure to remove linkage levers from devices of frame sizes HX and JX can cause
damage to the device as a result of undershooting the necessary voltage clearances.
• For devices of frame sizes HX and JX, remove the linkage levers marked in red once
the devices have been installed.

NOTICE
Material damage caused by loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in faulty electrical connections. This
can cause fire damage or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections with the specified tightening torques, e.g. line supply
connection, motor connection, DC link connections.
• Check the tightening torques of all power connections at regular intervals and tighten
them when required. This applies in particular after transport.

NOTICE
Damage to the devices when performing a voltage test as a result of connections that are
not disconnected
As part of routine tests, SINAMICS S components undergo a voltage test according to
EN 61800-5-1. Connected devices can be damaged.
• Disconnect or unplug all SINAMICS devices before the voltage test of the machine
equipment according to EN 60204-1, Section 18.4.

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when DRIVE-CLiQ cables are
used that are either incorrect or have not been released for this purpose.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
particular application.

Note
Operation on line supplies where energy recovery is not possible
In line supply systems without energy recovery capability (e.g. a diesel generator), device
faults can occur as the braking energy cannot be dissipated.
• For line supplies without regenerative feedback capability (e.g. diesel generator),
deactivate the regenerative feedback capability of the Line Modules using the appropriate
parameter (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual).
• The braking energy must then be dissipated via an additional Braking Module with
braking resistor in the drive line-up.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 169
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.3 Interface description

4.4.3.1 Overview

Figure 4-29 Active Line Module, frame size FX

Air-cooled chassis power units

170 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Figure 4-30 Active Line Module, frame size GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 171
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Figure 4-31 Active Line Module, frame size HX

Air-cooled chassis power units

172 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Figure 4-32 Active Line Module, frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 173
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.3.2 Connection example

Figure 4-33 Active Line Module wiring diagram

Air-cooled chassis power units

174 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.3.3 Line/load connection

Table 4- 31 Line/load connection of the Active Line Module

Terminals Technical specifications

U1, V1, W1 Voltage:
3 AC power input
• 3 AC 380 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 480 V +10 %
• 3 AC 500 V -10 % (-15 % < 1 min) ... 3 AC 690 V +10 %
Frequency: 47 ... 63 Hz
Connecting thread:
• Frame sizes FX / GX: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
DCPA, DCNA Voltage:
Connection for Braking
• 570 ... 720 V DC
Module
• 750 ... 1035 V DC
Connections:
• Frame sizes FX / GX: Threaded bolts M6 / 6 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: Connection for connection clip
DCP, DCN Voltage:
DC power output
• 570 ... 720 V DC
• 750 ... 1035 V DC
Connections:
• Frame sizes FX / GX: Thread M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: d = 12 mm (M12/50 Nm) flat connector for busbar
PE connection Connecting thread:
PE1, PE2
• Frame sizes FX / GX: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)

1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 175
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.3.4 X9 terminal strip

Table 4- 32 Terminal strip X9

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications

1 P24V Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 M Current consumption: max. 1.7 A
3 Bypass contactor control for Active Interface Module, X609:11
4 for Active Interface Module, X609:12
5 Pre-charge contactor control for Active Interface Module, X609:9
6 for Active Interface Module, X609:10
L1 Connection for fan supply 380 ... 480 VAC / 500 ... 690 VAC
L2 (frame sizes HX and JX only) Current consumption: See Technical data
Max. connectable cross-section: Terminals 1 ... 6: 2.5 mm2, Terminals L1 - L2: 35 mm2

Note
Connecting fan supply, with frame sizes FX and GX
The fan supply for frame sizes FX and GX is connected directly to fuse holders -F10 and
-F11.

4.4.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

Table 4- 33 Terminal strip X41

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 EP M1 (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Current consumption: 10 mA
3 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC
4 + Temp
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm2

Air-cooled chassis power units

176 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Only use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety
isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

NOTICE
Device failure as a result of unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors
Unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors can result in interference
being coupled into the signal processing electronics from the power side. This can result in
significant disturbance of all signals (fault messages) up to failure of individual components
(destruction of the devices).
• Only use shielded cables as temperature sensor cables.
• If temperature sensor cables are routed together with the motor cable, use separately
shielded cables twisted in pairs.
• Connect the cable shield to ground potential through a large surface area.
• Recommendation: Use suitable Motion Connect cables.

NOTICE
Risk of motor overheating due to incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats.
• Make sure that you connect the KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Note
The temperature sensor connection can be used for motors that are equipped with a KTY84-
1C130 or PTC probe in the stator windings.

Note
Connection to terminals 1 and 2
For operation, 24 VDC must be connected to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1. Pulse
suppression is activated when removed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 177
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.3.6 X42 terminal strip

Table 4- 34 Terminal strip X42 voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and Terminal Module

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 P24L Voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and
2 Terminal Module (18 to 28.8 V)
maximum load current: 3 A
3 M
4
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm2

Note
Connection options for terminal strip X42
The terminal strip is not intended for free 24 VDC availability (for example for supplying
further line-side components), as the voltage supply of the Control Interface Module could
also be overloaded and operating capability could thus be compromised.

4.4.3.7 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

Table 4- 35 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

PIN Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) 24 V power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (50 pcs.) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Air-cooled chassis power units

178 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.3.8 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module

Table 4- 36 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module

LED state Description

READY DC LINK
Off Off The electronics power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green Off The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place. The DC-link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place. The DC-link voltage is too high.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red --- At least one fault is present in this component.
Note:
LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured.
Flashing light --- Firmware is being downloaded.
0.5 Hz:
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON.
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / Note:
orange The two options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0124
or = 1.
red / orange

Table 4- 37 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module

LED Color Status Description

POWER OK Green Off DC-link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On The component is ready for operation.
Flashing There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
light POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.

WARNING
Danger to life when live parts of the DC link are touched
Irrespective of the state of the LED "DC LINK", hazardous DC-link voltages can always be
present.
• Observe the warning information on the component.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 179
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.4 Dimension drawing

Dimension drawing, frame size FX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-34 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size FX Front view, side view

Air-cooled chassis power units

180 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size GX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-35 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size GX Front view, side view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 181
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size HX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-36 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size HX Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

182 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Dimension drawing, frame size JX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 4-37 Dimension drawing Active Line Module, frame size JX Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 183
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.5 Electrical connection

Adjusting the fan voltage (-T10)

The power supply for the device fans (1 AC 230 V) in the Active Line Module (-T10) is taken
from the line supply using transformers. The locations of the transformers are indicated in
the interface descriptions.
The transformers are fitted with primary taps so that they can be fine-tuned to the line supply
voltage.
If necessary, the connection fitted in the factory, shown with a dashed line, must be
reconnected to the actual line voltage.

Note
Two transformers (–T10 and –T20) are installed in Active Line Modules, frame size JX. The
two primary-side terminals on each of these devices must be adjusted together.

Figure 4-38 Setting terminals for the fan transformers (3 AC 380 to 480 V / 3 AC 500 to 690 V

The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer
are indicated in the following tables (factory presetting: 480 V / 0 V or 690 V / 0 V).

Note
With the 3 AC 500 V to 690 V fan transformer, a jumper is inserted between the "600 V"
terminal and "CON" terminal. The jumper between terminal "600 V" and "CON" is for internal
use.

WARNING
Danger of fire due to overheating resulting from insufficient device fan voltage
If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual line voltage, overheating and human
danger due to smoke and fire may result.
This can also cause the fan fuses to blow due to overload.
• Set the terminals in accordance with the actual line voltage.

Air-cooled chassis power units

184 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Table 4- 38 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer
(3 AC 380 ... 480 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

380 V ± 10% 380 V
400 V ± 10% 400 V
440 V ± 10% 440 V
480 V ± 10% 480 V

Table 4- 39 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer
(3 AC 500 ... 690 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

500 V ± 10% 500 V
525 V ± 10% 525 V
575 V ± 10% 575 V
600 V ± 10% 600 V
660 V ± 10% 660 V
690 V ± 10% 690 V

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 185
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

4.4.6 Technical specifications

Table 4- 40 Technical data for Active Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3330– 7TE32–1AA3 7TE32–6AA3 7TE33–8AA3 7TE35–0AA3

Rated output
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 132 160 235 300
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 115 145 210 270
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 200 250 400 500
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 150 200 300 400
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 235 291 425 549
- Base load current IH_DC A 209 259 378 489
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 352 436 637 823
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Rated current In_E A 210 260 380 490
- Maximum current Imax_E A 315 390 570 735
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.5 x Uline
Pulse frequency kHz 4 4 4 4
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.1 1.1 1.35 1.35
- Total fan current consumption (at 400 VAC) A 0.63 1.13 1.8 1.8
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance µF 4200 5200 7800 9600
Power loss 1)

- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 2.2 2.7 3.9 4.8

- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 2.3 2.9 4.2 5.1
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.17 0.23 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level 2)
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 64 / 67 64 / 67 69 / 73 69 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M10 M10 M10 M10
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
- PE connection PE1 mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 2700 2700 2700 2700
- Unshielded m 4050 4050 4050 4050
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Air-cooled chassis power units

186 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 7TE32–1AA3 7TE32–6AA3 7TE33–8AA3 7TE35–0AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 326 326 326 326
- Height mm 1400 1400 1533 1533
- Depth mm 356 356 545 545
Frame size FX FX GX GX
Weight kg 95 95 136 136
Recommended fuse 3) 3NE1230-2 3NE1331-2 3NE1334-2 3NE1436-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 1 1
- Rated current 315 350 500 630
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 2 2 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 4) A 6200 10500 10500 8000
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module.
3) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
4) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 187
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Table 4- 41 Technical data for Active Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3330– 7TE36–1AA3 7TE37–5AA3 7TE38–4AA3 7TE41–0AA3

Rated output
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 380 450 500 630
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 335 400 465 545
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 600 600 700 900
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 500 600 700 800
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 678 835 940 1103
- Base load current IH_DC A 603 700 837 982
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 1017 1252 1410 1654
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Rated current In_E A 605 745 840 985
- Maximum current Imax_E A 907 1117 1260 1477
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.5 x Uline
Pulse frequency kHz 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5
- Total fan current consumption (at 400 VAC) A 3.6 3.6 3.6 5.4
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance µF 12600 15600 16800 18900
Power loss 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 6.2 7.3 7.7 10.1
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 6.6 7.7 8.2 10.8
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.78 0.78 0.78 1.08
Sound pressure level 2)
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 70 / 73 70 / 73 70 / 73 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M12 M12 M12 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- PE connection PE1 mm² 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 3 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 3900 3900 3900 3900
- Unshielded m 5850 5850 5850 5850
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 503 503 503 704
- Height mm 1475 1475 1475 1480
- Depth mm 540 540 540 550
Frame size HX HX HX JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

188 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 7TE36–1AA3 7TE37–5AA3 7TE38–4AA3 7TE41–0AA3

Weight kg 290 290 290 450
Recommended fuse 3) 3NE1438-2 3NE1333-2 3NE1334-2 3NE1436-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 2 2 2
- Rated current 800 450 500 630
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 2 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 4) A 9200 8800 10400 16000
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module.
3) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
4) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 189
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Table 4- 42 Technical data for Active Line Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 3

Order number 6SL3330– 7TE41–2AA3 7TE41–4AA3

Rated output
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 800 900
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW 690 780
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 1000 1250
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 460 V) HP 900 1000
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 1412 1574
- Base load current IH_DC A 1255 1401
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 2120 2361
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Rated current In_E A 1260 1405
- Maximum current Imax_E A 1890 2107
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3AC 480 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.5 x Uline
Pulse frequency kHz 2.5 2.5
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.7 1.7
- Total fan current consumption (at 400 VAC) A 5.4 5.4
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55
DC-link capacitance µF 26100 28800
Power loss 1)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 12.1 13.3
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 13 14.2
Cooling air requirement m3/s 1.08 1.08
Sound pressure level 2)
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 73 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M12 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 6 x 240 6 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar
- PE connection PE1 mm² 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 3 x 240 3 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 3900 3900
- Unshielded m 5850 5850
Degree of protection IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 704 704
- Height mm 1480 1480
- Depth mm 550 550
Frame size JX JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

190 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 7TE41–2AA3 7TE41–4AA3

Weight kg 450 450
Recommended fuse 3) 3NE1448-2 3NE1448-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 2 2
- Rated current 850 850
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 4) A 21000 21000
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module.
3) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
4) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 191
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Table 4- 43 Technical data for Active Line Modules, 3 AC 500 V ... 690 V

Order number 6SL3330– 7TG35–8AA3 7TG37–4AA3 7TG41–0AA3 7TG41–3AA3

Rated power
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 560 800 1100 1400
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 550 705 980 1215
- For In_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 435 560 780 965
- For IH_DC (50 Hz, 500 V) kW 400 510 710 880
- For In_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 600 900 1250 1500
- For IH_DC (60 Hz, 575 V) HP 450 600 1000 1250
DC-link current
- Rated current In_DC A 644 823 1148 1422
- Base load current IH_DC A 573 732 1022 1266
- Maximum current Imax_DC A 966 1234 1722 2133
Infeed/regenerative feedback current
- Rated current In_E A 575 735 1025 1270
- Maximum current Imax_E A 862 1102 1537 1905
Supply voltages
- Line voltage VACrms 3AC 500 -10% (-15% < 1 min) ... 3AC 690 +10%
- Line frequency Hz 47 ... 63Hz
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- DC-link voltage VDC 1.5 x Uline
Pulse frequency kHz 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.4 1.5 1.7 1.7
- 500 VAC A 3.0 4.4 4.4 4.4
- 690 VAC A 2.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance µF 7400 11100 14400 19200
Power loss 1)

- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 6.8 10.2 13.6 16.5

- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 6.2 9.6 12.9 15.3
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.78 1.08 1.08 1.08
Sound pressure level 2)
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 70 / 73 71 / 73 71 / 73 71 / 73
Line/load connection Flat connector for screw
M12 M12 M12 M12
Max. connection cross-sections
- Line connection (U1, V1, W1) mm² 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- PE connection PE1 mm² 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 240 3 x 240 3 x 240 3 x 240
Max. cable length
(total of all motor cables and DC link)
- Shielded m 2250 2250 2250 2250
- Unshielded m 3375 3375 3375 3375
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00

Air-cooled chassis power units

192 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330– 7TG35–8AA3 7TG37–4AA3 7TG41–0AA3 7TG41–3AA3

Dimensions
- Width mm 503 704 704 704
- Height mm 1475 1480 1480 1480
- Depth mm 540 550 550 550
Frame size HX JX JX JX
Weight kg 290 450 450 450
Recommended fuse 3) 3NE1447-2 3NE1448-2 3NE1436-2 3NE1438-2
- Number per phase (connected in parallel) 1 1 2 2
- Rated current 670 850 630 800
- Frame size acc. to IEC 60269 3 3 3 3
Minimum short-circuit current 4) A 8400 10500 16000 20000
1) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.
2) Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module.
3) To achieve a UL-approved system, it is absolutely essential to use the fuse types specified in the table.
4) Minimum current required for reliable triggering of the protective devices.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 193
Line Modules
4.4 Active Line Modules

Overload capability
The Active Line Modules have an overload reserve.
The criterion for overload is that the Active Line Module is operated with its base load current
before and after the overload occurs (a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis here).

High overload
The base load current for a high overload IH_DC is based on a duty cycle of 150% for 60 s; the
max. current Imax_DC can flow for 5 s.

Figure 4-39 High overload

Air-cooled chassis power units

194 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Motor Modules 5
5.1 Description
A Motor Module is a power unit (DC-AC inverter) that provides the power supply for the
motor connected to it. Power is supplied by means of the DC link of the drive unit.
A Motor Module must be connected to a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The open-loop and
closed-loop control functions are stored in the Control Unit.

Table 5- 1 Overview of Motor Modules

Frame size FX Frame size GX Frame size HX Frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 195
Motor Modules
5.1 Description

Operating principle
Motor Modules are designed for multi-axis drive systems and are controlled by either a
CU320-2 or a SIMOTION D Control Unit. Motor Modules are interconnected by means of a
shared DC busbar.
One or more Motor Modules are supplied with energy for the motors via the DC link. Both
synchronous and induction motors can be operated.
Since the Motor Modules share the same DC link, they can exchange energy with one
another, i.e. if one Motor Module operating in generator mode produces energy, the energy
can be used by another Motor Module operating in motor mode. The DC link is supplied with
line voltage by a Line Module.

Characteristics of the Motor Modules

● Version for 510 VDC to 720 VDC from 210 up to 1405 A
Version for 675 VDC to 1035 VDC from 85 up to 1270 A
● Internal air cooling
● Short-circuit/ground-fault-proof
● Electronic rating plate
● Operating status and error status via LEDs
● DRIVE-CLiQ interface for communication with the Control Unit and/or other components
in the drive line-up.
● Integration in system diagnostics

Air-cooled chassis power units

196 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.2 Safety information

5.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to the residual charge of the DC link capacitors
Because of the DC link capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to five minutes
after the power supply has been switched off.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Only open the device after five minutes have elapsed.
• Measure the voltage before starting work on the DCP and DCN DC link terminals.

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected from mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected from mechanical damage.

WARNING
Danger of an accident due to missing warning labels in the national language
Missing warning labels in the national language can result in death or serious injury.
• Attach the component warning labels in the national language.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 197
Motor Modules
5.2 Safety information

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service
lives of Line Modules.
• Observe the ventilation clearances above, below, and in front of the Motor Modules,
which are specified in the dimension drawings.

CAUTION
Fire hazard due to overheating when the total length of the power cables is exceeded
Overheating and a fire can result when the total length of the power cables is exceeded.
• Ensure that the total length of the power cables (motor connection cables and DC link
cables) does not exceed the values specified in the technical data.

NOTICE
Material damage caused by the failure to remove linkage levers for devices of frame sizes
HX and JX
The failure to remove linkage levers from devices of frame sizes HX and JX can cause
damage to the device as a result of undershooting the necessary voltage clearances.
• For devices of frame sizes HX and JX, remove the linkage levers marked in red once
the devices have been installed.

NOTICE
Material damage caused by loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in faulty electrical connections. This
can cause fire damage or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections with the specified tightening torques, e.g. line supply
connection, motor connection, DC link connections.
• Check the tightening torques of all power connections at regular intervals and tighten
them when required. This applies in particular after transport.

NOTICE
Damage to the devices when performing a voltage test as a result of connections that are
not disconnected
As part of routine tests, SINAMICS S components undergo a voltage test according to
EN 61800-5-1. Connected devices can be damaged.
• Disconnect or unplug all SINAMICS devices before the voltage test of the machine
equipment according to EN 60204-1, Section 18.4.

Air-cooled chassis power units

198 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.2 Safety information

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when DRIVE-CLiQ cables are
used that are either incorrect or have not been released for this purpose.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
particular application.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 199
Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

5.3 Interface description

5.3.1 Overview

Figure 5-1 Motor Module, frame size FX

Air-cooled chassis power units

200 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

Figure 5-2 Motor Module, frame size GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 201
Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

Figure 5-3 Motor Module, frame size HX

Air-cooled chassis power units

202 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

Figure 5-4 Motor Module, frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 203
Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

5.3.2 Connection example

Figure 5-5 Connection example Motor Modules

Air-cooled chassis power units

204 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

5.3.3 DC link/motor connection

Table 5- 2 DC link/motor connection of the Motor Module

Terminals Technical specifications

DCP, DCN Voltage:
DC power input
• 510 ... 720 VDC
• 675 ... 1035 VDC
Connections:
• Frame sizes FX / GX: Thread M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: d = 12 mm (M12/50 Nm) flat connector for busbar
DCPA, DCNA Voltage:
Connection for Braking
• 510 ... 720 VDC
Module
• 675 ... 1035 VDC
Connections:
• Frame sizes FX / GX: Threaded bolts M6 / 6 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with
DIN 46234 / DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: Connection for connection clip
DCPS, DCNS Voltage:
Connection for a dv/dt
• 510 ... 720 VDC
filter plus VPL
• 675 ... 1035 VDC
Connections:
• Frame sizes FX / GX: Thread M8 / 13 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: Thread M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
U2, V2, W2 Voltage:
3 AC power output
• 0 V 3 AC to 0.72 x DC link voltage
Connecting thread:
• Frame sizes FX / GX: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
PE connection Connecting thread:
PE1, PE2
• Frame sizes FX / GX: M10 / 25 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)
• Frame sizes HX / JX: M12 / 50 Nm for cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234 /
DIN 46235 1)

1) Dimensions for connecting alternative cable lugs, see "cable lugs" in the appendix.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 205
Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

5.3.4 X9 terminal strip

Table 5- 3 Terminal strip X9

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications

1 P24V Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 M Current consumption: max. 1.4 A

3 VL1 240 V AC: 8 A max.

4 VL2 24 VDC: max. 1 A
isolated
5 HS1 240 V AC: 8 A max.
6 HS2 24 VDC: max. 1 A
isolated
L1 Connection for fan supply 380 ... 480 VAC / 500 ... 690 VAC
L2 (frame sizes HX and JX only) Current consumption: See Technical data
Max. connectable cross-section: Terminals 1 ... 6: 2.5 mm2, Terminals L1 - L2: 35 mm2

Note
Connecting the fan supply with frame sizes FX and GX
The fan supply for frame sizes FX and GX is connected directly to fuse holders -F10 and
-F11.

5.3.5 DCPS, DCNS connection for a dv/dt filter

Table 5- 4 DCPS, DCNS

Frame size Connectable cross-section Terminal screw

FX 1 x 35 mm² M8
GX 1 x 70 mm² M8
HX 1 x 185 mm² M10
JX 2 x 185 mm² M10

With frame sizes FX and GX, the connecting cables are routed down through the Motor Module and out.

Air-cooled chassis power units

206 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

5.3.6 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

Table 5- 5 Terminal strip X41

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 EP M1 (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
2 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Current consumption: 10 mA
Signal propagation delay times:
L → H 100 μs
H → L: 1000 μs
The pulse inhibit function is only available when Safety
Integrated Basic Functions are enabled.
3 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC /
4 + Temp PT100
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm2

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Only use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety
isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

NOTICE
Device failure as a result of unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors
Unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors can result in interference
being coupled into the signal processing electronics from the power side. This can result in
significant disturbance of all signals (fault messages) up to failure of individual components
(destruction of the devices).
• Only use shielded cables as temperature sensor cables.
• If temperature sensor cables are routed together with the motor cable, use separately
shielded cables twisted in pairs.
• Connect the cable shield to ground potential through a large surface area.
• Recommendation: Use suitable Motion Connect cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 207
Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

NOTICE
Risk of motor overheating due to incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats.
• Make sure that you connect the KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Note
The temperature sensor connection can be used for motors that are equipped with a KTY84-
1C130 or PTC probe in the stator windings.

Note
Function of the EP terminals
The function of the EP terminals is only available when Safety Integrated Basic Functions
are enabled.

5.3.7 X42 terminal strip

Table 5- 6 Terminal strip X42 voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and Terminal Module

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 P24L Voltage supply for Control Unit, Sensor Module and
2 Terminal Module (18 to 28.8 V)
maximum load current: 3 A
3 M
4
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm2

Note
Connection options for terminal strip X42
The terminal strip is not intended for free 24 VDC availability (for example for supplying
further line-side components), as the voltage supply of the Control Interface Module could
also be overloaded and operating capability could thus be compromised.

Air-cooled chassis power units

208 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

5.3.8 X46 Brake control and monitoring

Table 5- 7 Terminal strip X46 brake control and monitoring

Terminal Function Technical specifications

1 BR output + The interface is intended for connection of the Safe
2 BR output - Brake Adapter.

3 FB input +
4 FB input -
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm2

WARNING
Fire hazard due to overheating when permissible connection cable lengths are exceeded
Excessively long connection cables on terminal strip X46 can cause components to
overheat with the associated risk of fire and smoke.
• Limit the length of the connection cables to a maximum of 10 m.
• Do not route the connection cable outside the control cabinet or control cabinet group.

5.3.9 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

Table 5- 8 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X400, X401, X402

PIN Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) 24 V power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (50 pcs.) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 209
Motor Modules
5.3 Interface description

5.3.10 Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module

Table 5- 9 Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module

LED state Description

READY DC LINK
Off Off The electronics power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green Off The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC-link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC-link voltage is too high.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red --- At least one fault is present in this component.
Note:
LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured.
Flashing light --- Firmware is being downloaded.
0.5 Hz:
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Firmware download is complete. Waiting for POWER ON.
Green / red
2 Hz flashing: --- Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / Note:
orange The two options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0124
or = 1.
red / orange

Table 5- 10 Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module

LED Color Status Description

POWER OK Green Off DC-link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On The component is ready for operation.
Flashing There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
light POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.

WARNING
Danger to life when live parts of the DC link are touched
Irrespective of the state of the LED "DC LINK", hazardous DC-link voltages can always be
present.
• Observe the warning information on the component.

Air-cooled chassis power units

210 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.4 Dimension drawing

5.4 Dimension drawing

Dimension drawing, frame size FX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 5-6 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size FX Front view, side view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 211
Motor Modules
5.4 Dimension drawing

Dimension drawing, frame size GX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 5-7 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size GX Front view, side view

Air-cooled chassis power units

212 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.4 Dimension drawing

Dimension drawing, frame size HX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 5-8 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size HX Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 213
Motor Modules
5.5 Electrical connection

Dimension drawing, frame size JX

The mandatory cooling clearances are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 5-9 Dimension drawing Motor Module, frame size JX Side view, rear view

Air-cooled chassis power units

214 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.5 Electrical connection

5.5 Electrical connection

Adjusting the fan voltage (-T10)

The power supply for the device fans (1 AC 230 V) in the Motor Module (-T10) is taken from
the line supply using transformers. The installation position of the transformers is indicated in
the interface descriptions.
The transformers are fitted with primary taps so that they can be fine-tuned to the line supply
voltage.
If necessary, the connection fitted in the factory, shown with a dashed line, must be
reconnected to the actual line voltage.

Note
Two transformers (T10 and -T20) are installed in Motor Modules frame size JX. The two
primary-side terminals on each of these devices must be adjusted together.

Figure 5-10 Setting terminals for the fan transformers (3 AC 380 to 480 V / 3 AC 500 to 690 V

The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer
are indicated in the following tables (factory presetting: 480 V / 0 V or 690 V / 0 V).

Note
With the 3 AC 500 V to 690 V fan transformer, a jumper is inserted between the "600 V"
terminal and "CON" terminal. The jumper between terminal "600 V" and "CON" is for internal
use.

WARNING
Danger of fire due to overheating resulting from insufficient device fan voltage
If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual line voltage, overheating and human
danger due to smoke and fire may result.
This can also cause the fan fuses to blow due to overload.
• Set the terminals in accordance with the actual line voltage.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 215
Motor Modules
5.5 Electrical connection

Table 5- 11 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer (3 AC 380 ... 480 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

380 V ± 10% 380 V
400 V ± 10% 400 V
440 V ± 10% 440 V
480 V ± 10% 480 V

Table 5- 12 Line voltage assignment for the setting at the fan transformer (3 AC 500 ... 690 V)

Line voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)

500 V ± 10% 500 V
525 V ± 10% 525 V
575 V ± 10% 575 V
600 V ± 10% 600 V
660 V ± 10% 660 V
690 V ± 10% 690 V

Air-cooled chassis power units

216 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

5.6 Technical specifications

5.6.1 510 V DC – 720 V DC Motor Modules

Table 5- 13 Technical data for Motor Modules, 510 ... 720 VDC, Part 1

Order number 6SL3320– 1TE32–1AA3 1TE32–6AA3 1TE33–1AA3 1TE33–8AA3

Output current
- Rated current IN A A 210 260 310 380
- Base load current IL A 205 250 302 370
- Base load current IH A 178 233 277 340
- For S6 operation (40%) IS6 A 230 285 340 430
- Max. output current Imax A 307 375 453 555
Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 110 132 160 200
- Based on IH (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 90 110 132 160
- Based on IL (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 150 200 250 300
- Based on IH (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 150 200 200 250
DC-link current
-Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 252 312 372 456
- Active Line Module A 227 281 335 411
Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 245 304 362 444
- Active Line Module A 221 273 326 400
Base load current IH DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 224 277 331 405
- Active Line Module A 202 250 298 365
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 510 ... 720
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.72 x DC-link voltage
Rated pulse frequency kHz 2 2 2 2
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 2 2 2 2
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 8 8 8 8
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance μF 4200 5200 6300 7800
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9
- Fan supply, at 2 AC 400 V, 50/60 Hz A 0.63 / 0.95 1.13 / 1.7 1.8 / 2.7 1.8 / 2.7
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 1.86 2.5 2.96 3.67
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 1.94 2.6 3.1 3.8
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.17 0.23 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 64 / 67 64 / 67 69 / 73 69 / 73

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 217
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order number 6SL3320– 1TE32–1AA3 1TE32–6AA3 1TE33–1AA3 1TE33–8AA3

Connections
- DC-link connection M10 M10 M10 M10
- Motor connection M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE connection PE1 M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE connection PE2 M10 M10 M10 M10
Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
- PE connection PE1 mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240
Max. motor cable length
- Shielded m 300 300 300 300
- Unshielded m 450 450 450 450
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Dimensions
- Width mm 326 326 326 326
- Height mm 1400 1400 1533 1533
- Depth mm 356 356 545 545
Frame size FX FX GX GX
Weight kg 95 95 136 136
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 400 V 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 460 V 60 Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Air-cooled chassis power units

218 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Table 5- 14 Technical data for Motor Modules, 510 ... 720 VDC, Part 2

Order number 6SL3320– 1TE35–0AA3 1TE36–1AA3 1TE37–5AA3 1TE38–4AA3

Output current
- Rated current IN A A 490 605 745 840
- Base load current IL A 477 590 725 820
- Base load current IH A 438 460 570 700
- For S6 operation (40%) IS6 A 540 -- -- ---
- Max. output current Imax A 715 885 1087 1230
Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 250 315 400 450
- Based on IH (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 200 250 315 400
- Based on IL (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 400 500 600 700
- Based on IH (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 350 350 450 600
DC-link current
-Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 588 726 894 1008
- Active Line Module A 529 653 805 907
Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 573 707 871 982
- Active Line Module A 515 636 784 884
Base load current IH DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 523 646 795 897
- Active Line Module A 470 581 716 807
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 510 ... 720
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.72 x DC-link voltage
Rated pulse frequency kHz 2 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 2 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 8 7.5 7.5 7.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance μF 9600 12600 15600 16800
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0
- Fan supply, at 2 AC 400 V, 50/60 Hz A 1.8 / 2.7 3.6 / 5.4 3.6 / 5.4 3.6 / 5.4
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 4.28 5.84 6.68 7.15
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 4.5 6.3 7.3 7.8
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.36 0.78 0.78 0.78
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 69 / 73 70 / 73 70 / 73 70 / 73
Connections
- DC-link connection M10 4 x M10 4 x M10 4 x M10
- Motor connection M10 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- PE connection PE1 M10 M12 M12 M12
- PE connection PE2 M10 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 219
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order number 6SL3320– 1TE35–0AA3 1TE36–1AA3 1TE37–5AA3 1TE38–4AA3

Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 240 Busbar Busbar Busbar
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
- PE connection PE1 mm² 2 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
Max. motor cable length
- Shielded m 300 300 300 300
- Unshielded m 450 450 450 450
Degree of protection IP20 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 326 503 503 503
- Height mm 1533 1475 1475 1475
- Depth mm 545 540 540 540
Frame size GX HX HX HX
Weight kg 136 290 290 290
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 400 V 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 460 V 60 Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Air-cooled chassis power units

220 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Table 5- 15 Technical data for Motor Modules, 510 ... 720 VDC, Part 3

Order number 6SL3320– 1TE41–0AA3 1TE41–2AA3 1TE41–4AA3 1TE41–4AS3

Output current
- Rated current IN A A 985 1260 1405 1330
- Base load current IL A 960 1230 1370 1310
- Base load current IH A 860 1127 1257 1150
- For S6 operation (40%) IS6 A -- -- -- --
- Max. output current Imax A 1440 1845 2055 2055
Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 560 710 800 800
- Based on IH (50 Hz 400 V) 1) kW 450 560 710 800
- Based on IL (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 800 1000 1150 1000
- Based on IH (60 Hz 460 V) 2) HP 700 900 1000 1000
DC-link current
-Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 1182 1512 1686 1550
- Active Line Module A 1064 1361 1517 1403
Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 1152 1474 1643 1525
- Active Line Module A 1037 1326 1479 1405
Base load current IH DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 1051 1345 1500 1676
- Active Line Module A 946 1211 1350 1403
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 510 ... 720
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.72 x DC-link voltage
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 2
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 2
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5 7.5 7.5 4
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance μF 18900 26100 28800 19200
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.25 1.4 1.4 1.4
- Fan supply, at 2 AC 400 V, 50/60 Hz A 5.4 / 8.1 5.4 / 8.1 5.4 / 8.1 5.4 / 8.1
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 400 V kW 9.5 11.1 12.0 10.8
- At 60 Hz 460 V kW 10.2 12.0 13.0 12.30
Cooling air requirement m3/s 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 73 71 / 73 71 / 73 71 / 73
Connections
- DC-link connection 4 x M10 4 x M10 4 x M10 4 x M10
- Motor connection 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12
- PE connection PE1 M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE connection PE2 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 221
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order number 6SL3320– 1TE41–0AA3 1TE41–2AA3 1TE41–4AA3 1TE41–4AS3

Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 6 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- PE connection PE1 mm² 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 3 x 240 3 x 240 3 x 240 3 x 240
Max. motor cable length
- Shielded m 300 300 300 300
- Unshielded m 450 450 450 450
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 704 704 704 704
- Height mm 1475 1475 1475 1475
- Depth mm 540 540 540 540
Frame size JX JX JX JX
Weight kg 450 450 450 450
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 400 V 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 460 V 60 Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Air-cooled chassis power units

222 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

5.6.2 675 V DC – 1035 V DC Motor Modules

Table 5- 16 Technical data for Motor Modules, 675 ... 1035 VDC, Part 1

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG28–5AA3 1TG31–0AA3 1TG31–2AA3 1TG31–5AA3

Output current
- Rated current IN A A 85 100 120 150
- Base load current IL A 80 95 115 142
- Base load current IH A 76 89 107 134
- Max. output current Imax A 120 142 172 213
Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 75 90 110 132
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 55 75 90 110
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 55 55 75 90
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 45 55 75 90
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 75 75 100 150
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 75 75 100 125
DC-link current
-Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 102 120 144 180
- Active Line Module A 92 108 130 162
Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 99 117 140 175
- Active Line Module A 89 105 126 157
Base load current IH DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 90 106 128 160
- Active Line Module A 81 96 115 144
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 675 ... 1035
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.72 x DC-link voltage
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance μF 1200 1200 1600 2800
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
- Fan supply, at 2 AC 690 V, 50/60 Hz A 0.4 / 0.6 0.4 / 0.6 0.4 / 0.6 0.4 / 0.6
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 1.17 1.43 1.89 1.80
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 1.1 1.3 1.77 1.62
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 64 / 67 64 / 67 64 / 67 64 / 67
Connections
- DC-link connection M10 M10 M10 M10
- Motor connection M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE connection PE1 M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE connection PE2 M10 M10 M10 M10

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 223
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG28–5AA3 1TG31–0AA3 1TG31–2AA3 1TG31–5AA3

Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
- PE connection PE1 mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
Max. motor cable length
- Shielded m 300 300 300 300
- Unshielded m 450 450 450 450
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Dimensions
- Width mm 326 326 326 326
- Height mm 1400 1400 1400 1400
- Depth mm 356 356 356 356
Frame size FX FX FX FX
Weight kg 95 95 95 95
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 500 V or 690 V 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 575 V 60 Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Air-cooled chassis power units

224 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Table 5- 17 Technical data for Motor Modules, 675 ... 1035 VDC, Part 2

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG31–8AA3 1TG32–2AA3 1TG32–6AA3 1TG33–3AA3

Output current
- Rated current IN A A 175 215 260 330
- Base load current IL A 171 208 250 320
- Base load current IH A 157 192 233 280
- Max. output current Imax A 255 312 375 480
Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 160 200 250 315
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 132 160 200 250
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 110 132 160 200
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 90 110 132 160
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 150 200 250 300
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 150 200 200 250
DC-link current
-Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 210 258 312 396
- Active Line Module A 189 232 281 356
Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 204 251 304 386
- Active Line Module A 184 226 273 347
Base load current IH DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 186 229 277 352
- Active Line Module A 168 206 250 316
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 675 ... 1035
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.72 x DC-link voltage
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance μF 2800 2800 3900 4200
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
- Fan supply, at 2 AC 690 V, 50/60 Hz A 1.0 / 1.5 1.0 / 1.5 1.0 / 1.5 1.0 / 1.5
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 2.67 3.09 3.62 4.34
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 2.5 2.91 3.38 3.98
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 69 / 73 69 / 73 69 / 73 69 / 73
Connections
- DC-link connection M10 M10 M10 M10
- Motor connection M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE connection PE1 M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE connection PE2 M10 M10 M10 M10

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 225
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG31–8AA3 1TG32–2AA3 1TG32–6AA3 1TG33–3AA3

Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
- PE connection PE1 mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
Max. motor cable length
- Shielded m 300 300 300 300
- Unshielded m 450 450 450 450
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Dimensions
- Width mm 326 326 326 326
- Height mm 1533 1533 1533 1533
- Depth mm 545 545 545 545
Frame size GX GX GX GX
Weight kg 136 136 136 136
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 500 V or 690 V 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 575 V 60 Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Air-cooled chassis power units

226 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Table 5- 18 Technical data for Motor Modules, 675 ... 1035 VDC, Part 3

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG34–1AA3 1TG34–7AA3 1TG35–8AA3 1TG37–4AA3

Output current
- Rated current IN A A 410 465 575 735
- Base load current IL A 400 452 560 710
- Base load current IH A 367 416 514 657
- Max. output current Imax A 600 678 840 1065
Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 400 450 560 710
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 315 400 450 630
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 250 315 400 500
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 200 250 315 450
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 400 450 600 700
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 350 450 500 700
DC-link current
-Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 492 558 690 882
- Active Line Module A 443 502 621 794
Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 479 544 672 859
- Active Line Module A 431 489 605 774
Base load current IH DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 437 496 614 784
- Active Line Module A 394 446 552 706
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 675 ... 1035
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.72 x DC-link voltage
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance μF 7400 7400 7400 11100
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.25
- Fan supply, at 2 AC 690 V, 50/60 Hz A 2.1 / 3.1 2.1 / 3.1 2.1 / 3.1 3.1 / 4.6
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 6.13 6.80 10.3 10.9
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 5.71 6.32 9.7 10.0
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.78 0.78 0.78 1.08
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 70 / 73 70 / 73 70 / 73 71 / 73
Connections
- DC-link connection 4 x M10 4 x M10 4 x M10 4 x M10
- Motor connection 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 3 x M12
- PE connection PE1 M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE connection PE2 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 3 x M12

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 227
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG34–1AA3 1TG34–7AA3 1TG35–8AA3 1TG37–4AA3

Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240
- PE connection PE1 mm² 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 3 x 240
Max. motor cable length
- Shielded m 300 300 300 300
- Unshielded m 450 450 450 450
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 503 503 503 704
- Height mm 1475 1475 1475 1475
- Depth mm 547 547 547 550
Frame size HX HX HX JX
Weight kg 290 290 290 450
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 500 V or 690 V 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 575 V 60 Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

Air-cooled chassis power units

228 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Table 5- 19 Technical data for Motor Modules, 675 ... 1035 VDC, Part 4

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG38–1AA3 1TG38–8AA3 1TG41–0AA3 1TG41–3AA3

Output current
- Rated current IN A A 810 910 1025 1270
- Base load current IL A 790 880 1000 1230
- Base load current IH A 724 814 917 1136
- Max. output current Imax A 1185 1320 1500 1845
Type rating
- Based on IL (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 800 900 1000 1200
- Based on IH (50 Hz 690 V) 1) kW 710 800 900 1000
- Based on IL (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 560 630 710 900
- Based on IH (50 Hz 500 V) 1) kW 500 560 630 800
- Based on IL (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 800 900 1000 1250
- Based on IH (60 Hz 575 V) 2) HP 700 800 900 1000
DC-link current
-Rated current IN DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 972 1092 1230 1524
- Active Line Module A 875 983 1107 1372
Base load current IL DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 947 1064 1199 1485
- Active Line Module A 853 958 1079 1337
Base load current IH DC when fed via
- Basic/Smart Line Module A 865 971 1094 1356
- Active Line Module A 778 874 985 1221
Supply voltages
- DC-link voltage VDC 675 ... 1035
- Electronic power supply VDC 24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
- Output voltage VACrms 0 ... 0.72 x DC-link voltage
Rated pulse frequency kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency without derating kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
- Max. pulse frequency with derating kHz 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
Max. ambient temperature
- Without derating °C 40 40 40 40
- With derating °C 55 55 55 55
DC-link capacitance μF 11100 14400 14400 19200
Current consumption
- Electronics current consumption (24 VDC) A 1.25 1.4 1.4 1.4
- Fan supply, at 2 AC 690 V, 50/60 Hz A 3.1 / 4.6 3.1 / 4.6 3.1 / 4.6 3.1 / 4.6
Power loss, max. 3)
- At 50 Hz 690 V kW 11.5 11.7 13.2 16.0
- At 60 Hz 575 V kW 10.5 10.6 12.0 14.2
Cooling air requirement m3/s 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08
Sound pressure level
LpA (1 m) at 50/60 Hz dB(A) 71 / 73 71 / 73 71 / 73 71 / 73
Connections
- DC-link connection 4 x M10 4 x M10 4 x M10 4 x M10
- Motor connection 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12
- PE connection PE1 M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE connection PE2 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x M12

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 229
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order number 6SL3320– 1TG38–1AA3 1TG38–8AA3 1TG41–0AA3 1TG41–3AA3

Max. conductor cross-sections
- DC-link connection (DCP, DCN) mm² Busbar Busbar Busbar Busbar
- Motor connection (U2, V2, W2) mm² 6 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240
- PE connection PE1 mm² 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240 1 x 240
- PE connection PE2 mm² 3 x 240 3 x 240 3 x 240 3 x 240
Max. motor cable length
- Shielded m 300 300 300 300
- Unshielded m 450 450 450 450
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
- Width mm 704 704 704 704
- Height mm 1475 1475 1475 1475
- Depth mm 550 550 550 550
Frame size JX JX JX JX
Weight kg 450 450 450 450
1) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 500 V or 690 V 50 Hz.
2) Rated power of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 3 AC 575 V 60 Hz.
3) The specified power loss is the maximum value at 100% capacity utilization. The value in normal operation is lower.

5.6.3 Overload capability

The Motor Modules have an overload reserve e.g. to handle breakaway torques.
In the case of drives with overload requirements, the appropriate base-load current must,
therefore, be used as a basis for the required load.
The criterion for overload is that the Motor Module is operated with its base load current
before and after the overload occurs (a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis here).

Air-cooled chassis power units

230 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Low overload
The base load current for low overload (IL) is based on a load duty cycle of 110% for 60 s or
150% for 10 s.

Figure 5-11 Low overload

High overload
The base load current for a high overload IH is based on a duty cycle of 150% for 60 s or
160% for 10 s.

Figure 5-12 High overload

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 231
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

5.6.4 Current de-rating depending on the pulse frequency

When the pulse frequency is increased, the derating factor of the output current must be
taken into account. This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the
technical data for Motor Modules.

Table 5- 20 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse
frequency of 2 kHz

Order No. Type rating Output current Derating factor at the pulse frequency
at 2 kHz
6SL3320-... [kW] [A] 2.5 kHz 4 kHz 5 kHz 7.5 kHz 8 kHz
Supply voltage 510 – 720 VDC
1TE32-1AAx 110 210 95% 82% 74% 54% 50%
1TE32-6AAx 132 260 95% 83% 74% 54% 50%
1TE33-1AAx 160 310 97% 88% 78% 54% 50%
1TE33-8AAx 200 380 96% 87% 77% 54% 50%
1TE35-0AAx 250 490 94% 78% 71% 53% 50%
1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 95% 80% -- -- --

Table 5- 21 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse
frequency of 1.25 kHz

Order No. Type rating Output current Derating factor at the pulse frequency
at 1.25 kHz
6SL3320-... [kW] [A] 2 kHz 2.5 kHz 4 kHz 5 kHz 7.5 kHz
Supply voltage 510 – 720 VDC
1TE36-1AAx 315 605 83% 72% 64% 60% 40%
1TE37-5AAx 400 745 83% 72% 64% 60% 40%
1TE38-4AAx 450 840 87% 79% 64% 55% 40%
1TE41-0AAx 560 985 92% 87% 70% 60% 50%
1TE41-2AAx 710 1260 92% 87% 70% 60% 50%
1TE41-4AAx 800 1405 97% 95% 74% 64% 50%
Supply voltage 675 – 1035 VDC
1TG28-5AAx 75 85 93% 89% 71% 60% 40%
1TG31-0AAx 90 100 92% 88% 71% 60% 40%
1TG31-2AAx 110 120 92% 88% 71% 60% 40%
1TG31-5AAx 132 150 90% 84% 66% 55% 35%
1TG31-8AAx 160 175 92% 87% 70% 60% 40%
1TG32-2AAx 200 215 92% 87% 70% 60% 40%
1TG32-6AAx 250 260 92% 88% 71% 60% 40%
1TG33-3AAx 315 330 89% 82% 65% 55% 40%
1TG34-1AAx 400 410 89% 82% 65% 55% 35%
1TG34-7AAx 450 465 92% 87% 67% 55% 35%
1TG35-8AAx 560 575 91% 85% 64% 50% 35%

Air-cooled chassis power units

232 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Order No. Type rating Output current Derating factor at the pulse frequency
at 1.25 kHz
1TG37-4AAx 710 735 87% 79% 64% 55% 35%
1TG38-1AAx 800 810 97% 95% 71% 55% 35%
1TG38-8AAx 900 910 92% 87% 67% 55% 33%
1TG41-0AAx 1000 1025 91% 86% 64% 50% 30%
1TG41-3AAx 1200 1270 87% 79% 55% 40% 25%

Note
Derating factors for pulse frequencies in the range between two fixed values
For pulse frequencies in the range between the specified fixed values, the relevant derating
factors can be determined by linear interpolation.

Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency

By multiplying the rated pulse frequency with a multiple integer, the following output
frequencies can be achieved taking into account the derating factors:

Table 5- 22 Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency in VECTOR
mode

Pulse frequency [kHz] Maximum output frequency [Hz]

1.25 100
2 160
2.5 200
4 320
5 400

Table 5- 23 Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency in SERVO
mode

Pulse frequency [kHz] Maximum output frequency [Hz]

2 300
4 300 / 650 1)

1) The maximum output frequency of 650 Hz can only be achieved for a current controller clock cycle
of 125 µs (factory setting: 250 µs).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 233
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

5.6.5 Parallel connection of Motor Modules

The following rules must be observed when connecting Motor Modules in parallel:
● Up to four identical Motor Modules can be connected in parallel.
● A common Control Unit is required whenever the modules are connected in parallel.
● The motor supply cables must have the same length (symmetrical design).
● Power must be supplied to the Motor Modules from a common DC link.
● For motors with a single winding system, supply cables with a minimum length or motor
reactors must be used. The cable lengths are listed in the following tables.
● A derating factor of 5% must be taken into consideration, regardless of the number of
Motor Modules connected in parallel.

Note
Mixed operation is not possible
It is only possible to connect identical power units in parallel if all power units have the same
hardware version. Mixed operation between a power unit with Control Interface Module
(order number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA3) and a power unit with Control Interface Board (order
number 6SL33xx-xxxxx–xAA0) is not possible.

Minimum cable lengths for parallel connection and connection to a motor with a single-winding
system

Note
Minimum cable lengths
The minimum cable lengths specified in the tables below must be observed when two or
more Motor Modules are connected in parallel and there is a connection to a motor with a
single-winding system. If the cable length required for the application cannot be achieved, a
motor reactor must be provided.

Air-cooled chassis power units

234 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Table 5- 24 Motor Modules, 510 ... 720 VDC

Order number Type rating Output current Minimum cable length

[kW] [A] [m]
6SL3320-1TE32-1AAx 110 210 30
6SL3320-1TE32-6AAx 132 260 27
6SL3320-1TE33-1AAx 160 310 20
6SL3320-1TE33-8AAx 200 380 17
6SL3320-1TE35-0AAx 250 490 15
6SL3320-1TE36-1AAx 315 605 13
6SL3320-1TE37-5AAx 400 745 10
6SL3320-1TE38-4AAx 450 840 9
6SL3320-1TE41-0AAx 560 985 8
6SL3320-1TE41-2AAx 710 1260 6
6SL3320-1TE41-4AAx 800 1405 5
6SL3320-1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 5

Table 5- 25 Motor Modules, 675 to 1035 VDC

Order number Type rating Output current Minimum cable length

[kW] [A] [m]
6SL3320-1TG28-5AAx 75 85 100
6SL3320-1TG31-0AAx 90 100 90
6SL3320-1TG31-2AAx 110 120 80
6SL3320-1TG31-5AAx 132 150 70
6SL3320-1TG31-8AAx 160 175 60
6SL3320-1TG32-2AAx 200 215 50
6SL3320-1TG32-6AAx 250 260 40
6SL3320-1TG33-3AAx 315 330 30
6SL3320-1TG34-1AAx 400 410 25
6SL3320-1TG34-7AAx 450 465 25
6SL3320-1TG35-8AAx 560 575 20
6SL3320-1TG37-4AAx 710 735 18
6SL3320-1TG38-1AAx 800 810 15
6SL3320-1TG38-8AAx 900 910 12
6SL3320-1TG41-0AAx 1000 1025 10
6SL3320-1TG41-3AAx 1200 1270 8

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 235
Motor Modules
5.6 Technical specifications

Air-cooled chassis power units

236 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
DC link components 6
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.1 Description
A Braking Module and an external braking resistor are required to bring drives to a controlled
standstill in the event of a power failure (e.g. emergency retraction or EMERGENCY STOP
category 1) or limit the DC-link voltage if the generator is operated for a short period of time,
for example because there is no regenerative feedback capability into the supply network
when a Basic Line Module is used. The Braking Module contains the power electronics and
the associated control.
During operation the DC-link energy is converted into heat loss in an external braking
resistor outside of the control cabinet. Braking Modules function autonomously. Parallel
operation of several braking modules is possible. In this case, each Braking Module must
have its own braking resistor.
Up to three slots are available depending on the size of the Basic Line Module, Smart Line
Module, Active Line Module, or Motor Module:

Frame sizes FB, GB, GD, FX, GX: 1 mounting location

Frame size HX: 2 mounting locations
Frame size JX: 3 mounting locations

Figure 6-1 Braking Module

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 237
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

Layout
The Braking Module in chassis format is inserted in a mounting location inside the Basic Line
Modules, Smart Line Modules, Active Line Modules, or Motor Modules, the fan of which
ensures forced cooling. The supply voltage for the electronics is drawn from the DC link. The
Braking Module is connected to the DC link by means of the busbar sets and flexible cables,
which are supplied as standard.
The activation threshold of the Braking Module can be adjusted by means of a DIP switch.
The braking power values specified in the technical specifications apply to the upper
activation threshold.
The Braking Module has as standard, the following interfaces:
● The DC link is connected through busbars and flexible cables
● Connecting terminal for external braking resistor
● 1 digital input (inhibit Braking Module with high signal / acknowledge error with negative
edge high-low)
● 1 digital output (Braking Module inhibited)
● 1 DIP switch for adjusting the activation threshold

Note
Installing a Braking Module of frame size GX in a Basic Line Module of frame size GB or GD
To install a frame size GX Braking Module in a frame size GB or GD Basic Line Module a
cable harness set is required, which is available under order number 6SL3366-2NG00-0AA0.

Air-cooled chassis power units

238 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to the residual charge of the DC link capacitors
Because of the DC link capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to five minutes
after the power supply has been switched off.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Only open the device after five minutes have elapsed.
• Measure the voltage before starting work on the DCP and DCN DC link terminals.

WARNING
Danger to life due to high leakage currents caused by an interrupted external protective
conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
• Ensure that the external protective conductor satisfies at least one of the following
conditions:
– It has been laid so that it is protected from mechanical damage. 1)
– For an individual core, it has a cross-section of at least 10 mm² Cu.
– If it is a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, it has a cross-section of at least
2.5 mm² Cu.
– It has a second protective conductor in parallel with the same cross-section.
– It complies with the local regulations for equipment with increased leakage current.
1)Cables laid within control cabinets or closed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected from mechanical damage.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 239
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

WARNING
Risk of fire due to ground fault/short-circuit
Inadequate installation of the cables to the braking resistor can result in a ground
fault/short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated smoke and fire.
• Comply with local installation regulations that enable this fault to be ruled out.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage.
• In addition, apply one of the following measures:
– Use cables with double insulation.
– Maintain adequate clearance, e.g. by using spacers.
– Route the cables in separate cable ducts or pipes.

WARNING
Danger of an accident due to missing warning labels in the national language
Missing warning labels in the national language can result in death or serious injury.
• Attach the component warning labels in the national language.

WARNING
Fire hazard due to overheating when permissible connection cable lengths are exceeded
Excessively long Braking Module connection cables can cause components to overheat
with the associated risk of fire and smoke.
• The lengths of the Braking Module connection cables may not exceed 100 m.

NOTICE
Material damage caused by loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in faulty electrical connections. This
can cause fire damage or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections with the specified tightening torques, e.g. line supply
connection, motor connection, DC link connections.
• Check the tightening torques of all power connections at regular intervals and tighten
them when required. This applies in particular after transport.

NOTICE
Damage through the use of non-released braking resistors
Braking resistors can be damaged when using braking resistors other than those specified
in this Manual.
• Only use braking resistors released by Siemens.

Air-cooled chassis power units

240 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.3 Interface description

6.1.3.1 Braking Module for frame sizes FX, FB

Figure 6-2 Braking Module for Active Line Module / Motor Module, frame size FX and for Basic Line
Module, frame size FB

Note
Common connection for the R1 and DCPA
With this Braking Module, the R1 and DCPA interfaces use the same connection.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 241
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.3.2 Braking Module for frame sizes GX, GB, GD

Figure 6-3 Braking Module for Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor Module, frame size
GX and for Basic Line Module, frame size GB, GD

Note
Common connection for the R1 and DCPA
With this Braking Module, the R1 and DCPA interfaces use the same connection.

Air-cooled chassis power units

242 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.3.3 Braking Module for frame sizes HX, JX

Figure 6-4 Braking Module for Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor Module, frame sizes HX / JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 243
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.3.4 Connection example

Figure 6-5 Connection example for Braking Module

6.1.3.5 Braking resistor connection

Table 6- 1 Braking resistor connection

Terminal Designation
R1 Braking resistor connection R+
R2 Braking resistor connection R-
Recommended conductor cross-sections: for 25/125 kW: 35 mm2, for 50/250 kW: 50 mm2

Air-cooled chassis power units

244 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.3.6 X21 digital inputs/outputs

Table 6- 2 X21 terminal strip

Terminal Designation 1) Technical specifications

1 Shield Shield connection for terminals 2 ... 6
2 0V High level: +15 ... 30 V
3 DI inhibit input current consumption: 2 ... 15 mA
Low level: -3 ... 5 V
4 0V High signal: No fault
5 DO fault output Low signal: Fault present
Voltage: 24 VDC
Load current: 0.5 ... 0.6 A
6 +24 V Voltage: +18 ... 30 V
Typical current consumption (intrinsic current
consumption):
10 mA at 24 VDC
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm2
1) DI: Digital input; DO: Digital output

Note
Position of the terminals
The position of the individual terminals of terminal strip X21 on the Braking Module are as
follows when the module is installed: Terminal "1" is at the back, terminal "6" is at the front.

Note
Signal characteristics of terminal X21.3
Applying a high signal to terminal X21.3 inhibits the Braking Module. On a falling edge,
pending error signals are acknowledged.

Note
Notes on setting
You will find setting instructions for wiring the signals in the SINAMICS S120 Function
Manual.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 245
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.3.7 S1 Threshold switch

The response threshold at which the Braking Module is activated and the DC-link voltage
generated during braking are specified in the following table.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when operating threshold switches
Operating the threshold switch when a voltage is present can cause death or serious injury.
• Only use the threshold switch when the Basic Line, Smart Line, Active Line, or Motor
Module are switched off and the DC link capacitors are discharged.

Table 6- 3 Response thresholds of the Braking Modules

Voltage Response Switch Remark

threshold position
3 AC 380 ... 673 V 1 774 V is the default factory setting. For line voltages of
480 V 774 V 2 between 3 AC 380 V and 400 V, the response threshold
can be set to 673 V to reduce the voltage stress on the
motor and converter. This does, however, reduce the
possible braking power with the square of the voltage
(673/774)² = 0.75.
The maximum possible braking power is therefore 75%.
3 AC 500 ... 841 V 1 967 V is the default factory setting. With a supply voltage
600 V 967 V 2 of 3 AC 500 V, the response threshold can be set to 841
V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and
converter. This does, however, reduce the possible
braking power with the square of the voltage (841/967)² =
0.75.
The maximum possible braking power is therefore 75%.
3 AC 660 ... 1070 V 1 1158 V is the default factory setting. With a supply
690 V 1158 V 2 voltage of 3 AC 660 V, the response threshold can be set
to 1070 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and
converter. This does, however, reduce the possible
braking power with the square of the voltage
(1070/1158)² = 0.85.
The maximum possible braking power is therefore 85%.

Air-cooled chassis power units

246 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

Note
Positions of the threshold switches
The switch positions of the threshold switches of the Braking Modules are positioned on the
panel as follows:
• Braking Modules for frame sizes FX, FB, GX, GB, GD: Position "1" is at the top; position
"2" is at the bottom
• Braking Modules for frame sizes HX and JX: Position "1" is at the back; position "2" is at
the front

Note
"Overvoltage" fault
Even when the response threshold is set to a low value, the DC-link voltage can still reach
the maximum voltage value (hardware shutdown threshold), thus triggering the
"Overvoltage" fault. This can occur, for example, in cases where there is too much
regenerative energy for the available braking power.
To prevent the DC-link voltage from exceeding the threshold, the Vdc-max controller must be
enabled (p1240) and the device supply voltage set accordingly (p0210).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 247
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.4 Installation

6.1.4.1 Installing the Braking Module in an Active Line Module / Motor Module, frame size FX

Figure 6-6 Installing the Braking Module in an Active Line Module / Motor Module, frame size FX –
steps 1 - 3

Air-cooled chassis power units

248 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

Figure 6-7 Installing the Braking Module in an Active Line Module / Motor Module, frame size FX –
steps 4 - 7

Installing the Braking Module

The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagrams in
front of them.
1. Unscrew the two M6 screws from the front cover and lift off the cover.
2. Unscrew the two screws from the upper cover plate.
Loosen the M6 nut on the left
Remove the left cover
3. Unscrew the four screws from the upper cover plate.
Unscrew the three screws from the rear cut-out sections
Remove the top covers.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 249
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

4. Unscrew the three screws of the blanking plate.

Remove the plate.
5. Insert the Braking Module where the cover used to be and secure it using the three
screws (from step 4).
6. Attach the adapter bar to the DCNA using a nut, so that the busbar cannot be twisted. For
this purpose, a small bolt is attached to the adapter bar, which must be located on the
lower side of the DCNA connection.
7. Secure the connecting cable to the DC link with two screws (Braking Module connection)
and two nuts (DC-link connection).
Carry out the subsequent steps in reverse order from steps 1 – 3.
An opening above the connections for the braking resistor (R1, R2) is provided in the cover
for connecting the cable to the braking resistor.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

250 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.4.2 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size GX

Figure 6-8 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size GX – steps 1 - 3

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 251
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

Figure 6-9 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size GX – steps 4 - 6

Installing the Braking Module

The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagrams in
front of them.
1. Unscrew the two M6 screws from the front cover and lift off the cover.
2. Unscrew the two screws from the upper cover plate.
Loosen the M6 nut on the left.
Remove the left cover
3. Unscrew the four screws from the upper cover plate.
Unscrew the three screws from the rear cut-out sections.
Remove the top covers.

Air-cooled chassis power units

252 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

4. Unscrew the three screws of the blanking plate.

Remove the plate.
5. Insert the Braking Module where the cover used to be and secure it using the three
screws (from step 4).
6. Secure the connecting cable to the DC link with two screws (Braking Module connection)
and two nuts (DC-link connection).
Carry out the subsequent steps in reverse order from steps 1 – 3.
An opening above the connections for the braking resistor (R1, R2) is provided in the cover
for connecting the cable to the braking resistor.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 253
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.4.3 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size HX

Figure 6-10 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size HX

Installing the Braking Module

The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram.
1. Insert the Braking Module.
2. Tighten the 4 retaining screws for the Braking Module.
3. Secure the connection clip to the DC link (DCPA / DCNA) with 2 screws (Braking Module
connection) and 2 nuts (DC link connection).

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

254 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.4.4 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size JX

Figure 6-11 Installing the Braking Module in a Smart Line Module / Active Line Module / Motor
Module, frame size JX

Installing the Braking Module

The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram.
1. Insert the Braking Module.
2. Tighten the four retaining screws for the Braking Module.
3. Secure the connection clip to the DC link (DCPA/DCNA) with two screws (Braking Module
connection) and two nuts (DC-link connection).

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 255
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.4.5 Installing the Braking Module in a Basic Line Module, frame size FB

Figure 6-12 Installing the Braking Module in a Basic Line Module, frame size FB

Installing the Braking Module

The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram.
1. Unscrew the three screws of the blanking plate.
Remove the plate.
2. Insert the Braking Module where the cover used to be and secure it using the three
screws (from step 1).

Air-cooled chassis power units

256 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

3. Attach the adapter bar to the DCNA using a nut, so that the busbar cannot be twisted. For
this purpose, a small bolt is attached to the adapter bar, which must be located on the
lower side of the DCNA connection.
4. Secure the connecting cable to the DC link with two screws (Braking Module connection)
and two nuts (DC-link connection).

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 257
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.4.6 Installing the Braking Module in a Basic Line Module, frame size GB, GD

Figure 6-13 Installing the Braking Module in a Basic Line Module, frame size GB, GD

Installing the Braking Module

Note
To install a frame size GX Braking Module in a frame size GB or GD Basic Line Module a
cable harness set is required, which is available under order number 6SL3366-2NG00-0AA0.

The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram.

Air-cooled chassis power units

258 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

1. Unscrew the three screws of the blanking plate.

Remove the plate.
2. Insert the Braking Module where the cover used to be and secure it using the three
screws (from step 1).
3. Use the connecting cable in the cable harness set (order number 6SL3366-2NG00-0AA0).
4. Secure the connecting cable to the DC link with two screws (Braking Module connection)
and two nuts (DC-link connection).

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 259
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

6.1.5 Technical specifications

Table 6- 4 Technical data, Braking Modules, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V

Braking Module 6SL3300- 1AE31-3AA0 1AE32-5AA0 1AE32-5BA0

Suitable for installation in:
Smart Line Module / Active Line Module /
Motor Module, frame size FX GX HX / JX
Basic Line Module, frame size FB GB, GD --
PDB power (rated power) 25 kW 50 kW 50 kW
P15 power (peak power) 125 kW 250 kW 250 kW
P20 power 100 kW 200 kW 200 kW
P40 power 50 kW 100 kW 100 kW
Variable response thresholds 774 V (673 V)
Digital input
Voltage -3 ... 30 V
Low level -3 ... 5 V
(an open digital input is interpreted as
"low")
High level 15 ... 30 V
Current consumption (typical at 24 VDC) 10 mA
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm²
Digital output (continuously short-circuit proof)
Voltage 24 VDC
Max. load current of the digital output 500 mA
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm²
R1/R2 connection M8 screw M8 screw M8 screw
Max. conductor cross-section R1/R2 35 mm² 50 mm² 50 mm²
Weight, approx. 3.6 kg 7.3 kg 7.5 kg

Air-cooled chassis power units

260 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

Table 6- 5 Technical data, Braking Modules, 3 AC 500 V ... 600 V

Braking Module 6SL3300- 1AF31-3AA0 1AF32-5AA0 1AF32-5BA0

Suitable for installation in:
Smart Line Module / Active Line Module /
Motor Module, frame size FX GX HX / JX
Basic Line Module, frame size FB GB, GD --
PDB power (rated power) 25 kW 50 kW 50 kW
P15 power (peak power) 125 kW 250 kW 250 kW
P20 power 100 kW 200 kW 200 kW
P40 power 50 kW 100 kW 100 kW
Variable response thresholds 967 V (841 V)
Digital input
Voltage -3 ... 30 V
Low level -3 ... 5 V
(an open digital input is interpreted as
"low")
High level 15 ... 30 V
Current consumption (typical at 24 VDC) 10 mA
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm²
Digital output (continuously short-circuit proof)
Voltage 24 VDC
Max. load current of the digital output 500 mA
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm²
R1/R2 connection M8 screw M8 screw M8 screw
Max. conductor cross-section R1/R2 35 mm² 50 mm² 50 mm²
Weight, approx. 3.6 kg 7.3 kg 7.5 kg

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 261
DC link components
6.1 Braking Module

Table 6- 6 Technical data, Braking Modules, 3 AC 660 V ... 690 V

Braking Module 6SL3300- 1AH31-3AA0 1AH32-5AA0 1AH32-5BA0

Suitable for installation in:
Smart Line Module / Active Line Module /
Motor Module, frame size FX GX HX / JX
Basic Line Module, frame size FB GB, GD
PDB power (rated power) 25 kW 50 kW 50 kW
P15 power (peak power) 125 kW 250 kW 250 kW
P20 power 100 kW 200 kW 200 kW
P40 power 50 kW 100 kW 100 kW
Variable response thresholds 1158 V (1070 V)
Digital input
Voltage -3 ... 30 V
Low level -3 ... 5 V
(an open digital input is interpreted as
"low")
High level 15 ... 30 V
Current consumption (typical at 24 VDC) 10 mA
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm²
Digital output (continuously short-circuit proof)
Voltage 24 VDC
Max. load current of the digital output 500 mA
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm²
R1/R2 connection M8 screw M8 screw M8 screw
Max. conductor cross-section R1/R2 35 mm² 50 mm² 50 mm²
Weight, approx. 3.6 kg 7.3 kg 7.5 kg

Air-cooled chassis power units

262 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

6.2 Braking resistors

6.2.1 Description
The excess energy of the DC link is dissipated via the braking resistor.
The braking resistor is connected to a Braking Module. The braking resistor is positioned
outside the cabinet unit or switchgear room. This enables the resulting heat loss around the
Basic Line Modules, Smart Line Modules, Active Line Modules, or Motor Modules to be
dissipated. This reduces the level of air conditioning required.
Resistors with rated powers of 25 kW and 50 kW are available.
Greater outputs can be implemented by connecting Braking Modules and braking resistors in
parallel. In this case, the Braking Modules are installed in the air duct of the Line Modules
and Motor Modules. Depending on the size of the respective module, up to three mounting
locations are available.
Since the braking resistors can be used in converters with a wide voltage range, the voltage
can be adjusted (for example, to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter) by
setting the response thresholds on the Braking Module.
A thermostatic switch monitors the braking resistor for overtemperature and issues a signal
on a floating contact if the limit value is exceeded.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 263
DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

6.2.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Fire hazard due to overheating when permissible connection cable lengths are exceeded
Excessively long Braking Module connection cables can cause components to overheat
with the associated risk of fire and smoke.
• The lengths of the Braking Module connection cables may not exceed 100 m.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in increased failures and reduced service
lives of braking resistors.
• It is essential that you maintain a ventilation clearance of 200 mm on all sides of the
component with ventilation grilles.

WARNING
Risk of fire due to ground fault/short-circuit
Inadequate installation of the cables to the braking resistor can result in a ground
fault/short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated smoke and fire.
• Comply with local installation regulations that enable this fault to be ruled out.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage.
• In addition, apply one of the following measures:
– Use cables with double insulation.
– Maintain adequate clearance, e.g. by using spacers.
– Lay the cables in separate cable ducts or conduits.

Air-cooled chassis power units

264 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

WARNING
Risk of fire through power loss of the braking resistor
A braking resistor which is not mounted properly can cause components to overheat with
the associated risk of fire and development of smoke.
• Only mount braking resistors on a baseplate/floor.
• Mount the braking resistors so that they are in the vertical position and freestanding.
Sufficient space must be available for dissipating the energy converted by the braking
resistor.
• Maintain sufficient clearance to objects that can burn.
• Do not place any objects on or above the braking resistor.

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperature of the braking resistor
The braking resistor can become very hot. You can get seriously burnt when touching the
surface.
• Mount the braking resistors so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach
a clearly visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.

NOTICE
Damage to braking resistor due to ingress of water
Water penetration may damage the braking resistor.
• For outdoor installations, a hood must be provided to protect it from precipitation in
accordance with degree of protection IP20.

Note
Braking resistor/fire alarm sensor interaction
If a braking resistor is placed underneath a fire alarm sensor, then the heat produced may
trigger the fire alarm sensor.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 265
DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

6.2.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 6-14 Dimension drawing braking resistor 25 kW/125 kW

Figure 6-15 Dimension drawing braking resistor 50 kW/250 kW

Air-cooled chassis power units

266 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

6.2.4 Electrical connection

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to applied voltage and residual charge of the DC
link capacitors on the Braking Module
Contact with live connections on the Braking Module can result in death or serious injury.
• Only connect the Braking Module after the Power Module has been disconnected from
the power supply.
• Only connect the Braking Module after 5 minutes have elapsed. Measure the voltage
before starting work on the DCP and DCN DC link terminals.

WARNING
Risk of fire due to ground fault/short-circuit
Inadequate installation of the cables to the braking resistor can result in a ground
fault/short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated smoke and fire.
• Comply with local installation regulations that enable this fault to be ruled out.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage.
• In addition, apply one of the following measures:
– Use cables with double insulation.
– Maintain adequate clearance, e.g. by using spacers.
– Lay the cables in separate cable ducts or conduits.

WARNING
Fire hazard due to overheating when permissible connection cable lengths are exceeded
Excessively long Braking Module connection cables can cause components to overheat
with the associated risk of fire and smoke.
• The lengths of the Braking Module connection cables may not exceed 100 m.

Recommended cable cross-sections:

● For 25/125 kW: 35 mm²
● For 50/250 kW: 50 mm²

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 267
DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

Thermostatic switch
A thermostatic switch is installed to protect the braking resistor against overload. Its floating
contacts must be integrated in the fault chain on the line side.

Table 6- 7 Thermostatic switch connection

Terminal Function Technical specifications

T1 Thermostatic switch connection Voltage: 250 VAC
T2 Thermostatic switch connection Load current: Max. 1 A

Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm²

6.2.5 Technical data

Table 6- 8 Technical data, braking resistors, 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC

Order number Unit 6SL3000-1BE31-3AA0 6SL3000-1BE32-5AA0

PDB (rated power) kW 25 50
P15 (peak power) kW 125 250
Max. current A 189 378
Resistance Ω 4.4 (± 7.5 %) 2.2 (± 7.5 %)
Cable entry via M50 cable gland via M50 cable gland
Power connection via M8 bolt-type terminal via M10 bolt-type terminal
Max. connectable cable cross-section mm² 50 70
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Width x height x depth mm 740 x 605 x 485 810 x 1325 x 485
Weight, approx. kg 50 120

Table 6- 9 Technical data, braking resistors, 500 V ... 600 V 3 AC

Order number Unit 6SL3000-1BF31-3AA0 6SL3000-1BF32-5AA0

PDB (rated power) kW 25 50
P15 (peak power) kW 125 250
Max. current A 153 306
Resistance Ω 6.8 (± 7.5 %) 3.4 (± 7.5 %)
Cable entry via M50 cable gland via M50 cable gland
Power connection via M8 bolt-type terminal via M10 bolt-type terminal
Max. connectable cable cross-section mm² 50 70
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Width x height x depth mm 740 x 605 x 485 810 x 1325 x 485
Weight, approx. kg 50 120

Air-cooled chassis power units

268 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

Table 6- 10 Technical data, braking resistors, 660 V ... 690 V 3 AC

Order number Unit 6SL3000-1BH31-3AA0 6SL3000-1BH32-5AA0

PDB (rated power) kW 25 50
P15 (peak power) kW 125 250
Max. current A 125 255
Resistance Ω 9.8 (± 7.5 %) 4.9 (± 7.5 %)
Cable entry via M50 cable gland via M50 cable gland
Power connection via M8 bolt-type terminal via M10 bolt-type terminal
Max. connectable cable cross-section mm² 50 70
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Width x height x depth mm 740 x 605 x 485 810 x 1325 x 485
Weight, approx. kg 50 120

Duty cycle

Figure 6-16 Duty cycle for braking resistors

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 269
DC link components
6.2 Braking resistors

Air-cooled chassis power units

270 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Motor-side power components 7
7.1 Sine-wave filter

7.1.1 Description
If a sine-wave filter is connected to the output of the Motor Module, the voltage between the
motor terminals is virtually sinusoidal. This reduces the voltage load on the motor windings
and prevents motor noise that would be induced by the pulse frequency.
Sine-wave filters are available up to a converter type power rating of 250 kW (without
consideration for derating).
The pulse frequency of the Motor Modules must be set to 4 kHz for the sine-wave filters.
This reduces the output current of the Motor Module.
When a sine-wave filter is used, the available output voltage decreases by 15 %.

Figure 7-1 Sine-wave filter

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 271
Motor-side power components
7.1 Sine-wave filter

7.1.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in increased failures and reduced service
lives of braking resistors.
• Maintain 100 mm ventilation clearances above and to the side of the component.

CAUTION
Risk of burns resulting from high surface temperature of the sine-wave filter
The surface temperature of the sine-wave filters can exceed 80° C. You can get seriously
burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the sine-wave filter so that it cannot be touched. If this is not possible, attach a
clearly visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.

NOTICE
Sine-wave filter damage due to interchanged connections
Interchanging the input and output connections will damage the sine-wave filter.
• Connect the incoming cable from the Motor Module to 1U1, 1V1, 1W1.
• Connect the outgoing cable to the load at 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.

NOTICE
Damage to the Motor Module by using components that have not been released
When using components that have not been released, damage or malfunctions can occur
at the devices or the system itself.
• Only use sine-wave filters that SIEMENS has released for SINAMICS.

Air-cooled chassis power units

272 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.1 Sine-wave filter

NOTICE
Risk of damaging sine-wave filter by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when sine-wave filters are used is 150 Hz. The
sine-wave filter can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the sine-wave filter with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.

NOTICE
Damage to the sine-wave filter if it is not activated during commissioning
The sine-wave filter may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the sine-wave filter during commissioning via parameter p0230 = 3.

NOTICE
Damage to the sine-wave filter if a motor is not connected
Sine-wave filters, which are operated without a motor being connected, can be damaged or
destroyed.
• Never operate a sine-wave filter connected to the Motor Module without a connected
motor.

Note
Cable lengths
Keep the connection cables to the Motor Module as short as possible (max. 5 m).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 273
Motor-side power components
7.1 Sine-wave filter

7.1.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 7-2 Dimension drawing, sine-wave filter

Air-cooled chassis power units

274 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.1 Sine-wave filter

Table 7- 1 Dimensions of the sine-wave filter (all values in mm)

6SL3000- 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-8AA0 2CE33-3AA0 2CE34-1AA0

B 620 620 620 620
H 300 300 370 370
T 320 320 360 360
I1 140 140 140 140
h1 180 180 220 220
h2 65 65 65 65
n1 1) 280 280 320 320
n2 1) 150 150 150 150
n3 1) 225 225 225 225
n4 105 105 105 105
d1 12 12 12 12
d2 11 11 11 11
d3 22 22 22 22
1) The lengths n1, n2 and n3 correspond to the drill hole spacing

7.1.4 Technical data

Table 7- 2 Technical data of sine-wave filters 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC

Order number 6SL3000- 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-8AA0 2CE33-3AA0 2CE34-1AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE32-1AAx 1TE32-6AAx 1TE33-1AAx 1TE33-8AAx 1TE35-0AAx
Rated current (type rating) of 170 A 215 A 270 A 330 A 380 A
the Motor Module with sine- (90 kW) (110 kW) (132 kW) (160 kW) (200 kW)
wave filter at a pulse
frequency of 4 kHz
Rated current A 225 225 276 333 408
Maximum output frequency Hz 150 150 150 150 150
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.35 0.35 0.4 0.245 0.38
- at 150 Hz kW 0.6 0.6 0.69 0.53 0.7
Connections
- to the Motor Module M10 connecting lugs
- load M10 connecting lugs
Max. permissible cable length m 300 (shielded)
between sine-wave filter and 450 (unshielded)
motor
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 620 620 620 620 620
Height mm 300 300 300 370 370
Depth mm 320 320 320 360 360
Weight kg 124 124 127 136 198

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 275
Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

7.2 Motor reactors

7.2.1 Description
Motor reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings by reducing the voltage
gradients at the motor terminals that occur when motors are fed from drive converters. At the
same time, the capacitive charge/discharge currents that also occur on the output of the
Motor Module when long motor cables are used are reduced.

7.2.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in increased failures and reduced service
lives of braking resistors.
• Maintain 100 mm ventilation clearances above and to the side of the component.

CAUTION
Risk of burns resulting from high surface temperature of the motor reactor
The surface temperature of the motor reactors can exceed 80° C. You can get seriously
burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the motor reactor so that it cannot be touched. If this is not possible, attach a
clearly visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.

Air-cooled chassis power units

276 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

NOTICE
Damage to the Motor Module by using components that have not been released
When using components that have not been released, damage or malfunctions can occur
at the devices or the system itself.
• Only use motor reactors that SIEMENS has released for SINAMICS.

NOTICE
Risk of damaging the motor reactor by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when a motor reactor is used is 150 Hz. The
motor reactor can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the motor reactor with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.

NOTICE
Damage to the motor reactor if the maximum pulse frequency is exceeded
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when a motor reactor is used is 2.5 kHz or 4
kHz. The motor reactor can be damaged if the pulse frequency is exceeded.
• When using the motor reactor, operate the Motor Module with a maximum pulse
frequency of 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz.

NOTICE
Damage to the motor reactor if it is not activated during commissioning
The motor reactor may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the motor reactor during commissioning via parameter p0230 = 1.

Note
Cable lengths
Keep the connection cables to the Motor Module as short as possible (max. 5 m).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 277
Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

7.2.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 7-3 Dimension drawing, motor reactor

Air-cooled chassis power units

278 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

Table 7- 3 Dimensions of motor reactors, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 1 (all specifications in mm)

6SL3000- 2BE32-1AA0 2BE32-6AA0 2BE33-2AA0 2BE33-8AA0 2BE35-0AA0

Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 2
a2 25 25 25 25 30
a3 5 5 5 5 6
a4 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 15
a5 11 11 11 11 14
I4 300 300 300 300 300
I5 100 100 100 100 100
h1 - - - - -
h2 194 227 194 194 245
h3 60 60 60 60 60
h4 285 315 285 285 365
n1 1) 163 183 163 183 183
n2 1) 224 224 224 224 224
n3 257 277 257 277 277
n4 79 79 79 79 79
d3 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Table 7- 4 Dimensions of motor reactors, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 2 (all specifications in mm)

6SL3000- 2AE36-1AA0 2AE38-4AA0 2AE41-0AA0 2AE41-4AA0

Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
a2 40 40 40 60
a3 8 8 8 12
a4 20 20 20 17
a5 14 14 14 14
a6 - - - 22
a7 - - - 19
I4 410 410 410 460
I5 140 140 140 160
h1 392 392 392 392
h2 252 252 252 255
h3 120 120 120 120
h4 385 385 385 385
n1 1) 191 191 206 212
n2 1) 316 316 316 356
n3 292 292 302 326
n4 84.5 84.5 79.5 94.5
n5 30 30 - -
d3 M10 M10 M10 M10
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 279
Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

Table 7- 5 Dimensions of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 V ... 690 V, Part 1 (all specifications in mm)

6SL3000- 2AH31-0AA0 2AH31-5AA0 2AH31-8AA0 2AH32-4AA0 2AH32-6AA0

Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
a2 25 25 25 25 25
a3 5 5 5 5 5
a4 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
a5 11 11 11 11 11
I4 270 270 300 300 300
I5 88 88 100 100 100
h1 - - - - -
h2 150 150 194 194 194
h3 60 60 60 60 60
h4 248 248 285 285 285
n1 1) 103 103 118 118 118
n2 1) 200 200 224 224 224
n3 200 200 212 212 212
n4 82 82 79 79 79
d3 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Table 7- 6 Dimensions of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 V ... 690 V, Part 2 (all specifications in mm)

6SL3000- 2AH33-6AA0 2AH34-5AA0 2AH34-7AA0 2AH35-8AA0 2AH38-1AA0

Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
a2 25 30 40 40 40
a3 5 6 8 8 8
a4 12.5 15 20 20 20
a5 11 14 14 14 14
I4 300 350 410 410 410
I5 100 120 140 140 140
h1 - - 392 392 392
h2 194 235 252 252 252
h3 60 60 120 120 120
h4 285 330 385 385 385
n1 1) 118 138 141 141 183
n2 1) 224 264 316 316 316
n3 212 215 292 292 279
n4 79 63 134.5 134.5 79.5
n5 - - 30 30 -
d3 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

280 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

Table 7- 7 Dimensions of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 V ... 690 V, Part 3 (all specifications in mm)

6SL3000- 2AH41-0AA0 2AH41-1AA0 2AH41-3AA0

Connection type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
a2 40 50 60
a3 8 8 12
a4 20 14 17
a5 14 14 14
a6 - 22 22
a7 - - 19
I4 410 410 460
I5 140 140 160
h1 392 392 392
h2 252 258 255
h3 120 120 120
h4 385 385 385
n1 1) 183 206 182
n2 1) 316 316 356
n3 279 317 296
n4 79.5 94.5 94.5
d3 M10 M10 M10
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 281
Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

7.2.4 Technical data

Table 7- 8 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3000- 2BE32-1AA0 2BE32-6AA0 2BE33-2AA0 2BE33-8AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE32-1AAx 1TE32-6AAx 1TE33-1AAx 1TE33-8AAx
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 110 132 160 200
Rated current A 210 260 310 380
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.436 0.454 0.422 0.447
- At 150 Hz kW 0.486 0.5 0.47 0.5
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M10 M10 M10 M10
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Max. permissible cable length between
motor reactor and motor
- With one motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- With two motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 300 300 300 300
Height mm 285 315 285 285
Depth mm 257 277 257 277
Weight, approx. kg 66 66 66 73

Table 7- 9 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 2BE35-0AA0 2AE36-1AA0 2AE38-4AA0 2AE38-4AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE35-0AAx 1TE36-1AAx 1TE37-5AAx 1TE38-4AAx
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 250 315 400 450
Rated current A 490 605 840 840
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.448 0.798 0.75 0.834
- At 150 Hz kW 0.5 0.9 0.84 0.943
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M12 M12 M12 M12
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE M8 M10 M10 M10
Max. permissible cable length between
motor reactor and motor
- With one motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- With two motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 300 410 410 410
Height mm 365 392 392 392
Depth mm 277 292 292 292
Weight, approx. kg 100 130 140 140

Air-cooled chassis power units

282 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

Table 7- 10 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 3

Order number 6SL3000- 2AE41-0AA0 2AE41-4AA0 2AE41-4AA0 2AE41-4AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE41-0AAx 1TE41-2AAx 1TE41-4AAx 1TE41-4AS3
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 560 710 800 800
Rated current A 985 1405 1405 1405
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.939 0.81 0.946 0.946
- At 150 Hz kW 1.062 0.9 1.054 1.054
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- PE M10 M10 M10 M10
Max. permissible cable length between
motor reactor and motor
- With one motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- With two motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 410 460 460 460
Height mm 392 392 392 392
Depth mm 302 326 326 326
Weight, approx. kg 146 179 179 179

Table 7- 11 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3000- 2AH31-0AA0 2AH31-0AA0 2AH31-5AA0 2AH31-5AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG28-5AAx 1TG31-0AAx 1TG31-2AAx 1TG31-5AAx
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 75 90 110 132
Rated current A 100 100 150 150
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.215 0.269 0.237 0.296
- At 150 Hz kW 0.26 0.3 0.26 0.332
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M10 M10 M10 M10
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable length between
motor reactor and motor
- With one motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- With two motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 270 270 270 270
Height mm 248 248 248 248
Depth mm 200 200 200 200
Weight, approx. kg 25 25 25.8 25.8

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 283
Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

Table 7- 12 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 2AH31-8AA0 2AH32-4AA0 2AH32-6AA0 2AH33-6AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG31-8AAx 1TG32-2AAx 1TG32-6AAx 1TG33-3AAx
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 160 200 250 315
Rated current A 175 215 260 330
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.357 0.376 0.389 0.4
- At 150 Hz kW 0.403 0.425 0.441 0.454
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M10 M10 M10 M10
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable length between
motor reactor and motor
- With one motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- With two motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 300 300 300 300
Height mm 285 285 285 285
Depth mm 212 212 212 212
Weight, approx. kg 34 34 40 46

Table 7- 13 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 3

Order number 6SL3000- 2AH34-5AA0 2AH34-7AA0 2AH35-8AA0 2AH38-1AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG34-1AAx 1TG34-7AAx 1TG35-8AAx 1TG37-4AAx
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 400 450 560 710
Rated current A 410 465 575 810
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.481 0.631 0.705 0.78
- At 150 Hz kW 0.545 0.723 0.801 0.91
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M12 M12 M12 M12
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Max. permissible cable length between
motor reactor and motor
- With one motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- With two motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 350 410 410 410
Height mm 330 392 392 392
Depth mm 215 292 292 279
Weight, approx. kg 68 80 80 146

Air-cooled chassis power units

284 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.2 Motor reactors

Table 7- 14 Technical data of motor reactors, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 4

Order number 6SL3000- 2AH38-1AA0 2AH41-0AA0 2AH41-1AA0 2AH41-3AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG38-1AAx 1TG38-8AAx 1TG41-0AAx 1TG41-3AAx
Type rating of the Motor Module kW 800 900 1000 1200
Rated current A 810 910 1025 1270
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.877 0.851 0.927 0.862
- At 150 Hz kW 1.003 0.965 1.052 0.952
Connections
- To the Motor Module (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) M12 M12 M12 M12
- Load (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Max. permissible cable length between
motor reactor and motor
- With one motor reactor m 300 (shielded) / 450 (unshielded)
- With two motor reactors in series m 525 (shielded) / 787 (unshielded)
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 410 410 410 460
Height mm 392 392 392 392
Depth mm 279 279 317 296
Weight, approx. kg 146 150 163 153

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 285
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3.1 Description
The dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter comprises two components: The dv/dt reactor and
the voltage-limiting network (voltage peak limiter) which cuts of the voltage peaks and
returns energy to the DC link. The dv/dt filters plus voltage peak limiter must be used for
motors for which the proof voltage of the insulation system is unknown or insufficient.
dv/dt filters plus voltage peak limiters limit the rate of voltage rise to values < 500 V/µs and
the typical voltage peaks with rated line voltages to the values below:
< 1000 V at Uline < 575 V
< 1250 V at 660 V < Uline < 690 V.

Components
The order numbers of the individual components (dv/dt reactor and voltage peak limiter) are
listed in the following table:

Table 7- 15 dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, order numbers of the individual components

dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter dv/dt reactor Voltage peak limiter
Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
6SL3000-2DE32-6AA0 6SL3000-2DE32-6CA0 6SL3000-2DE32-6BA0
6SL3000-2DE35-0AA0 6SL3000-2DE35-0CA0 6SL3000-2DE35-0BA0
6SL3000-2DE38-4AA0 6SL3000-2DE38-4CA0 6SL3000-2DE38-4BA0
6SL3000-2DE41-4AA0 2 x 6SL3000-2DE41-4DA0 6SL3000-2DE41-4BA0
Line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V
6SL3000-2DH31-0AA0 6SL3000-2DH31-0CA0 6SL3000-2DH31-0BA0
6SL3000-2DH31-5AA0 6SL3000-2DH31-5CA0 6SL3000-2DH31-5BA0
6SL3000-2DH32-2AA0 6SL3000-2DH32-2CA0 6SL3000-2DH32-2BA0
6SL3000-2DH33-3AA0 6SL3000-2DH33-3CA0 6SL3000-2DH33-3BA0
6SL3000-2DH34-1AA0 6SL3000-2DH34-1CA0 6SL3000-2DH34-1BA0
6SL3000-2DH35-8AA0 6SL3000-2DH35-8CA0 6SL3000-2DH35-8BA0
6SL3000-2DH38-1AA0 2 x 6SL3000-2DH38-1DA0 6SL3000-2DH38-1BA0
6SL3000-2DH41-3AA0 2 x 6SL3000-2DH41-3DA0 6SL3000-2DH41-3BA0

Air-cooled chassis power units

286 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 16 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter is used in devices with a rated pulse frequency
of 2 kHz

Order no. Power Output current for a Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt
6SL3320-... [kW] pulse frequency of filter is used
2 kHz [A]
Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
1TE32-1AAx 110 210 4 kHz
1TE32-6AAx 132 260 4 kHz
1TE33-1AAx 160 310 4 kHz
1TE33-8AAx 200 380 4 kHz
1TE35-0AAx 250 490 4 kHz
1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 4 kHz

Table 7- 17 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter is used in devices with a rated pulse frequency
of 1.25 kHz

Order no. Power Output current for a Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt
6SL3320-... [kW] pulse frequency of filter is used
1.25 kHz [A]
Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
1TE36-1AAx 315 605 2.5 kHz
1TE37-5AAx 400 745 2.5 kHz
1TE38-4AAx 450 840 2.5 kHz
1TE41-0AAx 560 985 2.5 kHz
1TE41-2AAx 710 1260 2.5 kHz
1TE41-4AAx 800 1405 2.5 kHz
Line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V
1TG28-5AAx 75 85 2.5 kHz
1TG31-0AAx 90 100 2.5 kHz
1TG31-2AAx 110 120 2.5 kHz
1TG31-5AAx 132 150 2.5 kHz
1TG31-8AAx 160 175 2.5 kHz
1TG32-2AAx 200 215 2.5 kHz
1TG32-6AAx 250 260 2.5 kHz
1TG33-3AAx 315 330 2.5 kHz
1TG34-1AAx 400 410 2.5 kHz
1TG34-7AAx 450 465 2.5 kHz
1TG35-8AAx 560 575 2.5 kHz
1TG37-4AAx 710 735 2.5 kHz
1TG38-1AAx 800 810 2.5 kHz
1TG38-8AAx 900 910 2.5 kHz
1TG41-0AAx 1000 1025 2.5 kHz
1TG41-3AAx 1200 1270 2.5 kHz

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 287
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in increased failures and reduced service
lives of braking resistors.
• Maintain 100 mm ventilation clearances above and below the component.

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperature of the dv/dt reactor
The surface temperature of the dv/dt reactors may exceed 80° C. You can get seriously
burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the dv/dt reactor so that it cannot be touched. If this is not possible, attach a
clearly visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.

NOTICE
Damage to the Voltage Peak Limiter due to interchanged connections
The Voltage Peak Limiter will be damaged if the input and output connections are
interchanged.
• Connect the incoming cable from the DC link of the Motor Module to DCPS, DCNS.
• Connect the outgoing cable for the dv/dt reactor to 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter by using components that have not been released
When using components that have not been released, damage or malfunctions can occur
at the devices or the system itself.
• Only use dv/dt filters that SIEMENS has released for operation with SINAMICS.

Air-cooled chassis power units

288 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when using a dv/dt filter is 150 Hz. The dv/dt
filter can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the dv/dt filter with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter by exceeding the maximum pulse frequency
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when using a dv/dt filter is 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz.
The dv/dt filter can be damaged if the pulse frequency is exceeded.
• When using the dv/dt filter, operate the Motor Module with a maximum pulse frequency
of 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter if it is not activated during commissioning
The dv/dt filter may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the dv/dt filter during commissioning via parameter p0230 = 2.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter if a motor is not connected
dv/dt filters which are operated without a motor being connected can be damaged or
destroyed.
• Never operate a dv/dt filter connected to the Motor Module without a connected motor.

Note
Cable lengths
Keep the connection cables to the Motor Module as short as possible (max. 5 m).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 289
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3.3 Interface description

Figure 7-4 Interface overview, voltage peak limiter, type 1

Figure 7-5 Interface overview, voltage peak limiter, type 2

Air-cooled chassis power units

290 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-6 Interface overview, voltage peak limiter, type 3

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 291
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-7 Connecting a dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter for versions with one dv/dt reactor

Figure 7-8 Connecting a dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter for versions with two dv/dt reactors

Air-cooled chassis power units

292 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Cable cross-sections

Table 7- 18 Cable cross-sections for connections between the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter
and Motor Module

dv/dt filter plus voltage Connection to the DC link Connection between dv/dt reactor and
peak limiter (DCPS/DCNS) voltage peak limiter
[mm²] (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) [mm²]
Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
6SL3000-2DE32-6AA0 35 10
6SL3000-2DE35-0AA0 70 16
6SL3000-2DE38-4AA0 2 x 50 50
6SL3000-2DE41-4AA0 2 x 120 120
Line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V
6SL3000-2DH31-0AA0 16 6
6SL3000-2DH31-5AA0 16 6
6SL3000-2DH32-2AA0 70 16
6SL3000-2DH33-3AA0 70 16
6SL3000-2DH34-1AA0 120 35
6SL3000-2DH35-8AA0 120 35
6SL3000-2DH38-1AA0 2 x 70 70
6SL3000-2DH41-3AA0 2 x 120 120

WARNING
Risk of fire due to ground fault/short-circuit
Inadequate installation of the cables to the Motor Module DC link can result in a ground
fault/short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated smoke and fire.
• Comply with local installation regulations that enable this fault to be ruled out.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage.
• In addition, apply one of the following measures:
– Use cables with double insulation.
– Maintain adequate clearance, e.g. by using spacers.
– Lay the cables in separate cable ducts or conduits.

Note
Maximum cable lengths
The connections should be kept as short as possible.
The maximum cable length for the specified connections is 5 m in each case.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 293
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3.5 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor

Figure 7-9 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor

Air-cooled chassis power units

294 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 19 Dimensions of dv/dt reactor, 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC (all dimensions in mm)

6SL3000- 2DE32-6CA0 2DE35-0CA0 2DE38-4CA0 2DE41-4DA0

a2 25 30 40 60
a3 5 6 8 10
a4 14 17 22 19
a5 10.5 x 14 14 x 18 14 x 18 14 x 18
a6 7 9 11 11
a7 - - - 17
a8 - - - 26
I4 410 460 460 445
I5 135 152.5 152.5 145
hmax 370 370 385 385
h2 258 240 280 250
h3 76 83 78 121
n1 1) 141 182 212 212
n2 1) 316 356 356 341
n3 229 275 312 312
n4 72 71 78 78
d3 M10 (12 x 18) M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22)
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Table 7- 20 Dimensions of dv/dt reactor, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC, part 1 (all dimensions in mm)

6SL3000- 2DH31-0CA0 2DH31-5CA0 2DH32-2CA0 2DH33-3CA0 2DH34-1CA0

a2 25 25 25 25 30
a3 6 6 5 5 6
a4 14 14 14 14 17
a5 10.5 x 14 10.5 x 14 10.5 x 14 10.5 x 14 14 x 18
a6 7 7 7 9 11
a7 - - - - -
a8 - - - - -
I4 350 350 460 460 460
I5 120 120 152.5 152.5 152.5
hmax 320 320 360 360 385
h2 215 215 240 240 280
h3 70 70 86 86 83
n1 1) 138 138 155 212 212
n2 1) 264 264 356 356 356
n3 227 227 275 275 312
n4 74 74 101 42 78
d3 M8 M8 M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22)
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 295
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 21 Dimensions of dv/dt reactor, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC, part 2 (all dimensions in mm)

6SL3000- 2DH35-8CA0 2DH38-1DA0 2DH41-3DA0

a2 40 50 60
a3 8 8 10
a4 22 16 19
a5 14 x 18 14 x 18 14 x 18
a6 11 11 11
a7 - 14 17
a8 - 22 26
I4 460 445 445
I5 152.5 145 145
hmax 385 385 385
h2 280 255 250
h3 78 114 121
n1 1) 212 212 212
n2 1) 356 341 341
n3 312 312 312
n4 78 78 78
d3 M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22) M12 (15 x 22)
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Air-cooled chassis power units

296 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3.6 Dimension drawing of the Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-10 Dimension drawing of the voltage peak limiter, type 1

Figure 7-11 Dimension drawing of the voltage peak limiter, type 2

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 297
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-12 Dimension drawing of the voltage peak limiter, type 3

Air-cooled chassis power units

298 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 22 Assigning voltage peak limiter to dimension drawings

Voltage peak limiter Dimension drawing type

Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
6SL3000-2DE32-6BA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DE35-0BA0 Type 2
6SL3000-2DE38-4BA0 Type 3
6SL3000-2DE41-4BA0 Type 3
Line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V
6SL3000-2DH31-0BA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DH31-5BA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DH32-2BA0 Type 2
6SL3000-2DH33-3BA0 Type 2
6SL3000-2DH34-1BA0 Type 3
6SL3000-2DH35-8BA0 Type 3
6SL3000-2DH38-1BA0 Type 3
6SL3000-2DH41-3BA0 Type 3

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 299
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.3.7 Technical data

Table 7- 23 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3000- 2DE32-6AA0 2DE32-6AA0 2DE35-0AA0 2DE35-0AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE32-1AAx 1TE32-6AAx 1TE33-1AAx 1TE33-8AAx
Type rating of the Motor kW 110 132 160 200
Module
Ithmax A 260 260 490 490
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.701 0.701 0.874 0.874
- At 60 Hz kW 0.729 0.729 0.904 0.904
- At 150 Hz kW 0.78 0.78 0.963 0.963
Connections
- To the Motor Module M10 M10 M12 M12
- Load M10 M10 M12 M12
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt 450 (unshielded)
reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 410 410 460 460
Height mm 370 370 370 370
Depth mm 229 229 275 275
Weight, approx. kg 66 66 122 122
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.029 0.029 0.042 0.042
- At 60 Hz kW 0.027 0.027 0.039 0.039
- At 150 Hz kW 0.025 0.025 0.036 0.036
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M8 M8 Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- DC M8 M8 Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- PE M8 M8 Terminal 35 mm² Terminal 35 mm²
Dimensions
Width mm 263 263 392 392
Height mm 265 265 285 285
Depth mm 188 188 210 210
Weight, approx. kg 6 6 16 16

Air-cooled chassis power units

300 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 24 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 2DE35-0AA0 2DE38-4AA0 2DE38-4AA0 2DE38-4AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE35-0AAx 1TE36-1AAx 1TE37-5AAx 1TE38-4AAx
Type rating of the Motor kW 250 315 400 450
Module
Ithmax A 490 840 840 840
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.874 1.106 1.106 1.106
- At 60 Hz kW 0.904 1.115 1.115 1.115
- At 150 Hz kW 0.963 1.226 1.226 1.226
Connections
- To the Motor Module M12 M12 M12 M12
- Load M12 M12 M12 M12
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt 450 (unshielded)
reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 460 460 460 460
Height mm 370 385 385 385
Depth mm 275 312 312 312
Weight, approx. kg 122 149 149 149
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.042 0.077 0.077 0.077
- At 60 Hz kW 0.039 0.072 0.072 0.072
- At 150 Hz kW 0.036 0.066 0.066 0.066
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor Terminal 70 mm² M8 M8 M8
- DC Terminal 70 mm² M8 M8 M8
- PE Terminal 35 mm² M8 M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 392 309 309 309
Height mm 285 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5
Depth mm 210 400 400 400
Weight, approx. kg 16 48 48 48

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 301
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 25 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 380 ... 480 V, Part 3

Order number 6SL3000- 2DE41-4AA0 1) 2DE41-4AA0 1) 2DE41-4AA0 1) 2DE41-4AA0 1)

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE41-0AAx 1TE41-2AAx 1TE41-4AAx 1TE41-4AS3
Type rating of the Motor kW 560 710 800 800
Module
Ithmax A 1405 1405 1405 1405
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 1.111 1.111 1.111 1.111
- At 60 Hz kW 1.154 1.154 1.154 1.154
- At 150 Hz kW 1.23 1.23 1.23 1.23
Connections
- To the Motor Module 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- Load 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt 450 (unshielded)
reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 445 445 445 445
Height mm 385 385 385 385
Depth mm 312 312 312 312
Weight, approx. kg 158 158 158 158
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.134 0.134 0.134 0.134
- At 60 Hz kW 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125
- At 150 Hz kW 0.114 0.114 0.114 0.114
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M10 M10 M10 M10
- DC M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 309 309 309 309
Height mm 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5
Depth mm 400 400 400 400
Weight, approx. kg 72 72 72 72
1) Two dv/dt reactors are required for these dv/dt filters. The technical data provided applies to one dv/dt reactor.

Note
Cable lengths for versions with two dv/dt reactors
For versions with 2 dv/dt reactors, the cable lengths specified in the table do not change.

Air-cooled chassis power units

302 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 26 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 1

Order number 6SL3000- 2DH31-0AA0 2DH31-0AA0 2DH31-5AA0 2DH31-5AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG28-5AAx 1TG31-0AAx 1TG31-2AAx 1TG31-5AAx
Type rating of the Motor kW 75 90 110 132
Module
Ithmax A 100 100 150 150
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.49 0.49 0.389 0.389
- At 60 Hz kW 0.508 0.508 0.408 0.408
- At 150 Hz kW 0.541 0.541 0.436 0.436
Connections
- To the Motor Module M10 M10 M10 M10
- Load M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt 450 (unshielded)
reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 350 350 350 350
Height mm 320 320 320 320
Depth mm 227 227 227 227
Weight, approx. kg 48 48 50 50
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.016 0.016 0.020 0.020
- At 60 Hz kW 0.015 0.015 0.019 0.019
- At 150 Hz kW 0.013 0.013 0.018 0.018
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M8 M8 M8 M8
- DC M8 M8 M8 M8
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 263 263 263 263
Height mm 265 265 265 265
Depth mm 188 188 188 188
Weight, approx. kg 6 6 6 6

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 303
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 27 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 2DH32-2AA0 2DH32-2AA0 2DH33-3AA0 2DH33-3AA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG31-8AAx 1TG32-2AAx 1TG32-6AAx 1TG33-3AAx
Type rating of the Motor kW 160 200 250 315
Module
Ithmax A 215 215 330 330
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.578 0.578 0.595 0.595
- At 60 Hz kW 0.604 0.604 0.62 0.62
- At 150 Hz kW 0.645 0.645 0.661 0.661
Connections
- To the Motor Module M10 M10 M10 M10
- Load M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt 450 (unshielded)
reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 460 460 460 460
Height mm 360 360 360 360
Depth mm 275 275 275 275
Weight, approx. kg 83 83 135 135
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.032 0.032 0.042 0.042
- At 60 Hz kW 0.03 0.03 0.039 0.039
- At 150 Hz kW 0.027 0.027 0.036 0.036
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- DC Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- PE Terminal 35 mm² Terminal 35 mm² Terminal 35 mm² Terminal 35 mm²
Dimensions
Width mm 392 392 392 392
Height mm 285 285 285 285
Depth mm 210 210 210 210
Weight, approx. kg 16 16 16 16

Air-cooled chassis power units

304 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 28 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 3

Order number 6SL3000- 2DH34-1AA0 2DH35-8AA0 2DH35-8AA0 2DH38-1AA0 1)

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG34-1AAx 1TG34-7AAx 1TG35-8AAx 1TG37-4AAx
Type rating of the Motor kW 400 450 560 710
Module
Ithmax A 410 575 575 810
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.786 0.862 0.862 0.828
- At 60 Hz kW 0.826 0.902 0.902 0.867
- At 150 Hz kW 0.884 0.964 0.964 0.927
Connections
- To the Motor Module M12 M12 M12 2 x M12
- Load M12 M12 M12 2 x M12
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt 450 (unshielded)
reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 460 460 460 445
Height mm 385 385 385 385
Depth mm 312 312 312 312
Weight, approx. kg 147 172 172 160
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.051 0.063 0.063 0.106
- At 60 Hz kW 0.048 0.059 0.059 0.1
- At 150 Hz kW 0.043 0.054 0.054 0.091
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M8 M8 M8 M10
- DC M8 M8 M8 M10
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 309 309 309 309
Height mm 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5
Depth mm 400 400 400 400
Weight, approx. kg 48 48 48 72
1) Two dv/dt reactors are required for these dv/dt filters. The technical data provided applies to one dv/dt reactor.

Note
Cable lengths for versions with two dv/dt reactors
For versions with 2 dv/dt reactors, the cable lengths specified in the table do not change.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 305
Motor-side power components
7.3 dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 29 Technical data of the dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 3 AC 500 ... 690 V, Part 4

Order number 6SL3000- 2DH38-1AA0 1) 2DH41-3AA0 1) 2DH41-3AA0 1) 2DH41-3AA0 1)

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG38-1AAx 1TG38-8AAx 1TG41-0AAx 1TG41-3AAx
Type rating of the Motor kW 800 900 1000 1200
Module
Ithmax A 810 1270 1270 1270
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
dv/dt reactor
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.828 0.865 0.865 0.865
- At 60 Hz kW 0.867 0.904 0.904 0.904
- At 150 Hz kW 0.927 0.966 0.966 0.966
Connections
- To the Motor Module 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- Load 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
- PE M6 M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible cable m 300 (shielded)
length between dv/dt 450 (unshielded)
reactor and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 445 445 445 445
Height mm 385 385 385 385
Depth mm 312 312 312 312
Weight, approx. kg 160 164 164 164
Voltage peak limiter
Power loss
- At 50 Hz kW 0.106 0.15 0.15 0.15
- At 60 Hz kW 0.1 0.14 0.14 0.14
- At 150 Hz kW 0.091 0.128 0.128 0.128
Connections
- To the dv/dt reactor M10 M10 M10 M10
- DC M10 M10 M10 M10
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8
Dimensions
Width mm 309 309 309 309
Height mm 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5 1312.5
Depth mm 400 400 400 400
Weight, approx. kg 72 72 72 72
1) Two dv/dt reactors are required for these dv/dt filters. The technical data provided applies to one dv/dt reactor.

Note
Cable lengths for versions with two dv/dt reactors
For versions with 2 dv/dt reactors, the cable lengths specified in the table do not change.

Air-cooled chassis power units

306 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.4.1 Description
The dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter comprises two components: The dv/dt
reactor and the voltage-limiting network (voltage peak limiter) which cuts off the voltage
peaks and feeds back the energy into the DC link. The dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak
limiter is designed for use with motors for which the voltage strength of the insulation system
is unknown or insufficient.
The dv/dt filters compact plus voltage peak limiter limit the voltage load on the motor cables
to values in accordance with the limit value curve A as per IEC/TS 60034-25:2007.
The rate of voltage rise is limited to < 1600 V/µs, the peak voltages are limited to < 1400 V.

Note
Setting range for pulse frequencies
It is permissible to set pulse frequencies in the range between the rated pulse frequency and
the relevant maximum pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter
is used.

Note
Current derating at increased pulse frequency
For current derating with increased pulse frequency, the derating of the associated Motor
Module is the decisive factor.

Note
Components of the dv/dt filter
The dv/dt filters compact plus voltage peak limiter of types 1 to 3 consist of a single
component. Type 4 consists of two separate components, the dv/dt reactor and the voltage
peak limiter.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 307
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 30 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter is used in
units with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz

Order no. of the Type rating Output current for a Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt
Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of filter compact plus voltage peak
6SL3320-... 2 kHz [A] limiter is used
Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
1TE32-1AAx 110 210 4 kHz
1TE32-6AAx 132 260 4 kHz
1TE33-1AAx 160 310 4 kHz
1TE33-8AAx 200 380 4 kHz
1TE35-0AAx 250 490 4 kHz
1TE41-4AS3 800 1330 4 kHz

Table 7- 31 Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter is used in
units with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz

Order no. of the Type rating Output current for a Max. pulse frequency when a dv/dt
Motor Module [kW] pulse frequency of filter compact plus voltage peak
6SL3320-... 1.25 kHz [A] limiter is used
Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
1TE36-1AAx 315 605 2.5 kHz
1TE37-5AAx 400 745 2.5 kHz
1TE38-4AAx 450 840 2.5 kHz
1TE41-0AAx 560 985 2.5 kHz
1TE41-2AAx 710 1260 2.5 kHz
1TE41-4AAx 800 1405 2.5 kHz
Line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V
1TG28-5AAx 75 85 2.5 kHz
1TG31-0AAx 90 100 2.5 kHz
1TG31-2AAx 110 120 2.5 kHz
1TG31-5AAx 132 150 2.5 kHz
1TG31-8AAx 160 175 2.5 kHz
1TG32-2AAx 200 215 2.5 kHz
1TG32-6AAx 250 260 2.5 kHz
1TG33-3AAx 315 330 2.5 kHz
1TG34-1AAx 400 410 2.5 kHz
1TG34-7AAx 450 465 2.5 kHz
1TG35-8AAx 560 575 2.5 kHz
1TG37-4AAx 710 735 2.5 kHz
1TG38-1AAx 800 810 2.5 kHz
1TG38-8AAx 900 910 2.5 kHz
1TG41-0AAx 1000 1025 2.5 kHz
1TG41-3AAx 1200 1270 2.5 kHz

Air-cooled chassis power units

308 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.4.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating with a risk for personnel through
smoke development and fire. This can also result in increased failures and reduced service
lives of braking resistors.
• Maintain 100 mm ventilation clearances above and below the component.
• Always mount the dv/dt filters compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter in a vertical, upright
position to enable cooling air to flow through the heat sink on the Voltage Peak Limiter
from the bottom to the top.

CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high surface temperature of the dv/dt filter compact
The surface temperature of the dv/dt filters compact may exceed 80° C. You can get
seriously burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the dv/dt filters compact so that they cannot be touched. If this is not possible,
attach a clearly visible and understandable warning notice at hazardous positions.

NOTICE
Damage to the Voltage Peak Limiter due to interchanged connections
The Voltage Peak Limiter will be damaged if the input and output connections are
interchanged on devices with the order numbers 6SL3000-2DE41-4EA0, 6SL3000-2DG38-
1EA0, and 6SL3000-2DG41-3EA0.
• Connect the incoming cable from the DC link of the Motor Module to DCPS, DCNS.
• Connect the outgoing cable for the dv/dt reactor to 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 309
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact by using components that have not been released
When using components that have not been released, damage or malfunctions can occur
at the devices or the system itself.
• Only use a dv/dt filter compact that SIEMENS has released for operation with
SINAMICS.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact by exceeding the maximum output frequency
The maximum permissible output frequency when using a dv/dt filter compact is 150 Hz.
The dv/dt filter compact can be damaged if the output frequency is exceeded.
• Operate the dv/dt filter compact with a maximum output frequency of 150 Hz.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact during continuous operation with low output frequencies
Continuous operation at an output frequency less than 10 Hz can produce thermal overload
and destroy the dv/dt filter.
• Do not operate the drive when using a dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
continuously with an output frequency less than 10 Hz.
• You may operate the drive for a maximum load duration of 5 minutes at an output
frequency less than 10 Hz, provided that you then select an operation with an output
frequency higher than 10 Hz for a period of 5 minutes.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact by exceeding the maximum pulse frequency
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when using a dv/dt filter compact is 2.5 kHz or
4 kHz. The dv/dt filter compact can be damaged if the pulse frequency is exceeded.
• When using the dv/dt filter compact, operate the Motor Module with a maximum pulse
frequency of 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact if it is not activated during commissioning
The dv/dt filter compact may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the dv/dt filter compact during commissioning via parameter p0230 = 2.

Air-cooled chassis power units

310 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact if a motor is not connected
dv/dt filters compact which are operated without a motor being connected can be damaged
or destroyed.
• Never operate a dv/dt filter compact connected to the Motor Module without a connected
motor.

Note
Cable lengths
Keep the connection cables to the Motor Module as short as possible (max. 5 m). Use an
equivalent cable type when replacing the cables supplied.

7.4.3 Interface description

Figure 7-13 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 1

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 311
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-14 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 2

Figure 7-15 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 3

Air-cooled chassis power units

312 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-16 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 4 dv/dt reactor

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 313
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-17 Interface overview for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, Type 4 Voltage
Peak Limiter

Air-cooled chassis power units

314 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.4.4 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-18 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter - integrated unit

Figure 7-19 Connecting the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter - separate components

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 315
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Cable cross-sections
In a dv/dt filter with separate voltage peak limiter (type 4), the connections between dv/dt
reactor and voltage peak limiter are already installed on the voltage peak limiter.

Table 7- 32 Cable cross-sections for connections between a dv/dt filter and Motor Module

dv/dt filter compact plus Cross-section Connection on dv/dt filter

voltage peak limiter [mm²]
Type 1 16 Screw M8 / 12 Nm
Type 2 25 Screw M8 / 12 Nm
Type 3 50 Copper bar for M8 bolt / 12 Nm
Type 4 95 Copper bar for M8 bolt / 12 Nm

Table 7- 33 Connection cable enclosed for connecting dv/dt reactor and voltage peak limiter

Voltage peak limiter Cross-section Lug for connecting 1U2 / 1V2 / 1W2 on the dv/dt
[mm²] reactor
Type 4 70 M12

Cable type: 600 V, UL style 3271, operating temperature 125° C

WARNING
Risk of fire due to ground fault/short-circuit
Inadequate installation of the cables to the Motor Module DC link can result in a ground
fault/short-circuit and place persons at risk as a result of the associated smoke and fire.
• Comply with local installation regulations that enable this fault to be ruled out.
• Protect the cables from mechanical damage.
• In addition, apply one of the following measures:
– Use cables with double insulation.
– Maintain adequate clearance, e.g. by using spacers.
– Lay the cables in separate cable ducts or conduits.

WARNING
Damage to the dv/dt filter compact due to mechanical load on connections
The connections at the dv/dt filter compact are not designed for direct mechanical
connection to the motor cables.
• Take line-side measures to ensure that the connections cannot be deformed by the
mechanical load exerted by the connected cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

316 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

7.4.5 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 1

Figure 7-20 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 1

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 317
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 2

Figure 7-21 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 2

Air-cooled chassis power units

318 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 3

Figure 7-22 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 3

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 319
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 4

Figure 7-23 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 4 dv/dt reactor

Air-cooled chassis power units

320 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Figure 7-24 Dimension drawing for dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, type 4 Voltage peak
limiter

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 321
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 34 Assignment of dv/dt filters compact plus voltage peak limiter to the dimension drawings

dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter Dimension drawing type
Line voltage 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
6SL3000-2DE32-6EA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DE35-0EA0 Type 2
6SL3000-2DE38-4EA0 Type 3
6SL3000-2DE41-4EA0 Type 4
Line voltage 3 AC 500 ... 690 V
6SL3000-2DG31-0EA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DG31-5EA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DG32-2EA0 Type 2
6SL3000-2DG33-3EA0 Type 2
6SL3000-2DG34-1EA0 Type 3
6SL3000-2DG35-8EA0 Type 3
6SL3000-2DG38-1EA0 Type 4
6SL3000-2DG41-3EA0 Type 4

7.4.6 Technical data

Table 7- 35 Technical data of the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC, Part 1

Order number 6SL3000- 2DE32-6EA0 2DE35-0EA0 2DE38-4EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE32-1AAx (110 kW) 1TE33-1AAx (160 kW) 1TE36-1AAx (315 kW)
(unit rating) 1TE32-6AAx (132 kW) 1TE33-8AAx (200 kW) 1TE37-5AAx (400 kW)
1TE35-0AAx (250 kW) 1TE38-4AAx (450 kW)
Ithmax A 260 490 840
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.210 0.290 0.518
- at 60 Hz kW 0.215 0.296 0.529
- at 150 Hz kW 0.255 0.344 0.609
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for M10 bolt for M10 bolt for M12 bolt
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 screw for M8 screw for M8 bolt
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for M10 bolt for M10 bolt for M12 bolt
- PE M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Max. permissible cable m 100 (shielded)
length between dv/dt filter 150 (unshielded)
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 310 350 440
Height mm 283 317 369
Depth mm 238 260 311
Weight, approx. kg 41 61 103

Air-cooled chassis power units

322 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 36 Technical data of the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 380 V ... 480 V 3 AC, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 2DE41-4EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TE41-0AAx (560 kW)
(unit rating) 1TE41-2AAx (710 kW)
1TE41-4AAx (800 kW)
1TE41-4AS3 (800 kW)
Ithmax A 1405
Degree of protection IP00
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 1.154
- at 60 Hz kW 1.197
- at 150 Hz kW 1.444
Max. permissible cable m 100 (shielded)
length between dv/dt filter 150 (unshielded)
and motor
dv/dt reactor
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for 2 x M12 bolts
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for 2 x M12 bolts
- PE M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 430
Height mm 385
Depth mm 323
Weight, approx. kg 168.8
Voltage Peak Limiter
Terminals
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 bolt
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for M8 bolt
- PE for M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 277
Height mm 360
Depth mm 291
Weight, approx. kg 19.2

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 323
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 37 Technical data of the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC, Part 1

Order number 6SL3000- 2DG31-0EA0 2DG31-5EA0 2DG32-2EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG28-5AAx (75 kW) 1TG31-2AAx (110 kW) 1TG31-8AAx (160 kW)
(unit rating) 1TG31-0AAx (90 kW) 1TG31-5AAx (132 kW) 1TG32-2AAx (200 kW)
Ithmax A 100 150 215
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.227 0.270 0.305
- at 60 Hz kW 0.236 0.279 0.316
- at 150 Hz kW 0.287 0.335 0.372
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for M10 bolt for M10 bolt for M10 bolt
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 screw for M8 screw for M8 screw
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for M10 bolt for M10 bolt for M10 bolt
- PE M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Max. permissible cable m 100 (shielded)
length between dv/dt filter 150 (unshielded)
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 310 310 350
Height mm 283 283 317
Depth mm 238 238 260
Weight, approx. kg 34 36 51

Table 7- 38 Technical data of the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC, Part 2

Order number 6SL3000- 2DG33-3EA0 2DG34-1EA0 2DG35-8EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG32-6AAx (250 kW) 1TG34-1AAx (400 kW) 1TG34-7AAx (450 kW)
(unit rating) 1TG33-3AAx (315 kW) 1TG35-8AAx (560 kW)
Ithmax A 330 410 575
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.385 0.550 0.571
- at 60 Hz kW 0.399 0.568 0.586
- at 150 Hz kW 0.480 0.678 0.689
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for M10 bolt for M12 bolt for M12 bolt
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 screw for M8 bolt for M8 bolt
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for M10 bolt for M12 bolt for M12 bolt
- PE M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw
Max. permissible cable m 100 (shielded)
length between dv/dt filter 150 (unshielded)
and motor
Dimensions
Width mm 350 440 440
Height mm 317 369 369
Depth mm 260 311 311
Weight, approx. kg 60 87 100

Air-cooled chassis power units

324 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Table 7- 39 Technical data of the dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 500 V ... 690 V 3 AC, Part 3

Order number 6SL3000- 2DG38-1EA0 2DG41-3EA0

Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3320- 1TG37-4AAx (710 kW) 1TG38-8AAx (900 kW)
(unit rating) 1TG38-1AAx (800 kW) 1TG41-0AAx (1000 kW)
1TG41-3AAx (1200 kW)
Ithmax A 810 1270
Degree of protection IP00 IP00
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.964 1.050
- at 60 Hz kW 0.998 1.104
- at 150 Hz kW 1.196 1.319
Max. permissible cable m 100 (shielded)
length between dv/dt filter 150 (unshielded)
and motor
dv/dt reactor
Terminals
- 1U1/1V1/1W1 for 2 x M12 bolts for 2 x M12 bolts
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for 2 x M12 bolts for 2 x M12 bolts
- PE M6 screw M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 430 430
Height mm 385 385
Depth mm 323 323
Weight, approx. kg 171.2 175.8
Voltage Peak Limiter
Terminals
- DCPS/DCNS for M8 bolt for M8 bolt
- 1U2/1V2/1W2 for M8 bolt for M8 bolt
- PE for M6 screw for M6 screw
Dimensions
Width mm 277 277
Height mm 360 360
Depth mm 291 291
Weight, approx. kg 18.8 19.2

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 325
Motor-side power components
7.4 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter

Air-cooled chassis power units

326 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Cabinet design and EMC 8
8.1 Information

8.1.1 General
The modular concept of SINAMICS S120 allows a wide range of potential device
combinations. For this reason, it is impossible to describe each individual combination. This
section instead aims to provide some basic information and general rules on the basis of
which special device combinations can be constructed and to ensure electromagnetic
compatibility.
The SINAMICS S120 components are designed for installation in enclosures, which can take
the form of cabinet units or control boxes made of steel that provide protection against shock
and other environmental influences. They are also part of the EMC concept.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 327
Cabinet design and EMC
8.1 Information

8.1.2 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Danger of injury caused by foreign objects in the device
Parts (e.g.: drilling chips, end sleeves) falling into the device can cause short-circuits and
damage the insulation. This can lead to serious injuries (arcing, bangs, pieces flying out of
the equipment).
• Only perform installation and other work when the devices are current-free.
• Cover the ventilation slits during the installation of the cabinet and remove the cover
before switching on.

NOTICE
Limiting of overvoltages
On systems with a grounded phase conductor and a line voltage >600 VAC, line-side
components should be installed to limit overvoltages to overvoltage category II according to
IEC 61800-5-1.

Air-cooled chassis power units

328 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Cabinet design and EMC
8.1 Information

Maximum cable lengths

Table 8- 1 Maximum cable lengths

Type Maximum length [m]

24 VDC power cables 1) 10
24 V signal cables 1) 30
Power cable between the Motor Module and motor 300 (shielded)
450 (unshielded)
when using two motor reactors in series 525 (shielded)
787 (unshielded)
DRIVE-CLiQ cables
• Inside cabinet unit, 70
e.g. connection between CU320 and the first Motor Module or
between the Motor Modules
100
• DRIVE-CLiQ MOTION-CONNECT connecting cables for
external components
Power cable between Braking Module and braking resistor 100
1) For longer lengths, suitable wiring must be provided by the user for overvoltage protection.

Table 8- 2 Recommendations for overvoltage protection

DC supply 24 V signal cables

Weidmüller Weidmüller
Type: PU DS 24 V Type no.: MCZ OVP TAZ 24 V
Order number: 8682100000 Order number: 8449160000
Weidmüller GmbH & Co. KG

8.1.3 Directives
The product satisfies the protection targets of the following EU Directives applicable within
the European Union:

Table 8- 3 Directives

Directive Description
2006/95/EC Directive of the European Parliament and Council of December 12, 2006 on the approximation of
the laws of the member states relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits (Low-Voltage Directive)
2004/108/EC Directive of the European Parliament and Council of December 15, 2004, which repeals directive
89/336/EEC, on the approximation of laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive)
2006/42/EC Directive of the European Parliament and Council of May 17, 2006 on machinery and for
changing Directive 95/16/EC (amendment) (machinery directive)

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 329
Cabinet design and EMC
8.2 EMC-compliant design and control cabinet configuration

8.2 EMC-compliant design and control cabinet configuration

Detailed configuration instructions regarding the EMC-compliant design of drives and control
cabinet configuration can be found in the "SINAMICS Low Voltage Configuration Manual",
see Configuration Manual for SINAMICS G130, G150, S120 Built-in Units, S120 Cabinet
Modules, S150 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/83180185).

8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

8.3.1 General
The minimum dimensions listed below for ventilation clearances must be observed. No other
components or cables may be installed in or laid through these areas.

NOTICE
Reduced service life due to non-compliance with the installation guidelines
If the guidelines for installing SINAMICS S120 Chassis devices are not observed, this can
significantly reduce the service life of the components and result in premature component
failure.
• Observe the guidelines for installing the components.

You must take into account the following specifications when using a SINAMICS S120
Chassis drive line-up:
● Ventilation clearance
● Cabling
● Air guidance

Table 8- 4 Ventilation clearances for the components

Component Frame size Clearance (front) Clearance (above) Clearance (below)

[mm] [mm] [mm]
Basic Line Module FB, GB, GD 40 1) 250 150
Active Interface Module FI 40 1) 250 150
Active Interface Module GI 50 1) 250 150
Active Interface Module HI, JI 40 1) 250 0
Smart Line Module GX, HX, JX 40 1) 250 150
Active Line Module FX, GX, HX, JX 40 1) 250 150
Motor Module FX, GX, HX, JX 40 1) 250 150
1) The clearances refer to the area around the ventilation slots on the front cover.

Air-cooled chassis power units

330 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Note
Notes on the dimensions
The dimensions refer to the outer edges of the devices.
Dimension drawings are available in the relevant chapters.

8.3.2 Ventilation
The SINAMICS S120 Chassis devices are forced-ventilated by means of integrated fans. To
ensure an adequate air supply, suitable openings for the inlet air (e.g. ventilation slots in the
cabinet door) and discharged air (e.g. by means of a hood) must be provided.
The cooling air must flow through the components vertically from bottom (cooler region) to
top (region heated by operation).
You must ensure that the air is flowing in the right direction. You must also ensure that the
warm air can escape at the top. The specified ventilation clearances must be observed.

Note
Cables must not be routed directly on the components. The ventilation grilles must not be
covered.
Cold air must not be allowed to blow directly onto electronic equipment.

NOTICE
Device failure due to condensation as a result of unsuitable air guidance and cooling
Unsuitable air guidance and cooling equipment can cause condensation, which can result
in device failure.
• Choose air guidance measures, as well as the arrangement of and settings for the
cooling equipment in such a way as to prevent condensation even with the highest
relative humidity.
• If required, install cabinet enclosure heating.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 331
Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Figure 8-1 Air guidance for Active Interface Module, frame sizes FI, GI

Air-cooled chassis power units

332 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Figure 8-2 Air guidance for Active Interface Module, frame sizes HI, JI

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 333
Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Figure 8-3 Air guidance for Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, Motor Module, frame sizes FX,
GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

334 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Figure 8-4 Air guidance for Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, Motor Module, frame sizes HX,
JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 335
Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Figure 8-5 Air guidance for Basic Line Module, frame sizes FB, GB, GD

Devices must not be operated in an "air short-circuit", since this can damage equipment or
cause it to fail.
The drawn air of the fan causes negative pressure to build up at the ventilation openings in
the cabinet doors. The pressure is dependent on the volume flow rate and the hydraulic
cross-section of the openings.
The air, which blows out of the top of the device, accumulates under the top cover/hood,
resulting in overpressure.
The difference between the overpressure at the top of the cabinet and the negative pressure
at the bottom creates a flow of air (air short-circuit). This can vary in strength depending on
the cross-section of the door and cover openings and the volumetric flow of the fan.

Air-cooled chassis power units

336 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Due to the flow of air within the cabinet, the device fan draws in pre-heated air. This heats up
the components considerably and the fan does not function effectively.

NOTICE
Device failure due to air short-circuit in the control cabinet
Unsuitable air guidance can cause an air short-circuit, which can result in overheating in the
control cabinet and device failure.
• Install suitable barriers in the control cabinet in order to prevent an air short-circuit from
occurring.

Barriers must be installed in such a way that no air can flow along the outer sides on the top
and bottom of the devices. In particular, air must be prevented from flowing from the top
(warm discharged air) to the bottom (cold cooling air). Suitable plates can be used as
barriers. The barriers must reach up to the side panels or cabinet doors. They must be set
up in such a way that the outgoing air current is not forced into the cabinet cross-beams, but
is instead diverted around them. Barriers must be in place for all degrees of protection higher
than IP20.
The cabinets adjacent to the converter cabinets must also be taken into account when
barriers are installed.
To ensure adequate ventilation of the equipment, the minimum opening sizes specified in the
following table must be observed.
The specified opening cross-sections comprise several small openings. To ensure that
pressure loss is kept to a minimum and that the flow resistance does not become too high at
these mesh-type openings, the cross sectional area of each opening must be at least
190 mm² (e.g. 7.5 mm x 25 mm or 9.5 mm x 20 mm).
To ensure that the devices operate continuously, suitable measures must be taken to
prevent the ingress of dirt and dust. Wire lattices (wire fabric DIN 4189-St-vzk-1x0.28) or
filter mats (min. filter class G2) must be used for this purpose. The choice of filter mats
depends on the required degree of protection and the ambient conditions. If cabinets are
installed in an environment containing fine dust particles or oil vapors, micro-filter mats must
be used to prevent the devices from becoming contaminated.
If dirt filters are used, the specified opening cross-sections and the filter areas must be
adjusted upwards.

NOTICE
Device failure due to overheating as a result of contaminated dirt filters
Contaminated filter mats cause the device to overheat and fail.
• If dirt filters are used, observe the specified replacement intervals.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 337
Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

If the filter mats are heavily contaminated, the volume of air drawn is reduced due to the
increased flow resistance. This can cause the fans integrated in the devices to overload, or it
could cause the devices themselves to overheat and become damaged.
The opening cross-sections specified in the table refer in each case to one device. If more
than one device is installed in a cabinet, the opening cross-section increases accordingly. If
the required openings cannot be made in the cabinet, the devices must be distributed across
several cabinets which are separated from each other by means of partitions.
The warm air must be discharged via the top cover/hood or via side openings in the cabinet
at the level of the device top. The size of the opening cross-section must also be taken into
account here.
With degrees of protection higher than IP20 and if a hood is used, it may be necessary to
use an "active" hood. An "active" hood contains fans that blow the air current forwards. The
hood is closed, with the exception of the air outlet point.
If you choose an "active" hood, you must ensure that the fans are sufficiently powerful to
prevent air from accumulating in the cabinet. If air accumulates, the cooling capacity is
reduced. This can overheat and destroy the devices. The air capacity of the fans should at
least be equivalent to the device fan data.

Table 8- 5 Volume flow rate, opening cross-sections

Active Interface Modules

Order number 6SL3300- 7TE32-6AA0 7TE33-8AA0 7TE38-4AA0
7TE35-0AA0 7TE41-4AA0
7TG35-8AA0
7TG37-4AA0
7TG41-3AA0
Cooling air [m³/s] 0.24 0.47 0.4
requirement
Min. opening
cross-section in
cabinet inlet
outlet
[m²] 0.1 0.25 0.2
[m²] 0.1 0.25 0.2
Basic Line Modules
Order number 6SL3330- 1TE34-2AAx 1TE41-2AAx
1TE35-3AAx 1TE41-5AAx
1TE38-2AAx 1TE41-6AAx
1TG33-0AAx 1TG41-1AAx
1TG34-3AAx 1TG41-4AAx
1TG36-8AAx 1TG41-8AAx
Cooling air [m³/s] 0.17 0.36
requirement
Min. opening
cross-section in
cabinet inlet
outlet
[m²] 0.1 0.19
[m²] 0.1 0.19

Air-cooled chassis power units

338 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Smart Line Modules

Order number 6SL3330- 6TE35-5AAx 6TE41-1AAx 6TE41-3AAx
6TE37-3AAx 6TG38-8AAx 6TE41-7AAx
6TG35-5AAx 6TG41-2AAx
6TG41-7AAx
Cooling air [m³/s] 0.36 0.78 1.08
requirement
Min. opening
cross-section in
cabinet inlet
outlet
[m²] 0.19 0.28 0.38
[m²] 0.19 0.28 0.38
Active Line Modules
Order number 6SL3330- 7TE32-1AAx 7TE32-6AAx 7TE33-8AAx 7TE36-1AAx 7TE41-0AAx
7TE35-0AAx 7TE37-5AAx 7TE41-2AAx
7TE38-4AAx 7TE41-4AAx
7TG37-4AAx
7TG41-0AAx
7TG41-3AAx
Cooling air [m³/s] 0.17 0.23 0.36 0.78 1.08
requirement
Min. opening
cross-section in
cabinet inlet
outlet
[m²] 0.1 0.1 0.19 0.28 0.38
[m²] 0.1 0.1 0.19 0.28 0.38
Motor Modules
Order number 6SL3320- 1TE32-1AAx 1TE32-6AAx 1TE33-1AAx 1TE36-1AAx 1TE41-0AAx
1TG28-5AAx 1TE33-8AAx 1TE37-5AAx 1TE41-2AAx
1TG31-0AAx 1TE35-0AAx 1TE38-4AAx 1TE41-4AAx
1TG31-2AAx 1TG31-8AAx 1TG34-1AAx 1TE41-4AS3
1TG31-5AAx 1TG32-2AAx 1TG34-7AAx 1TG37-4AAx
1TG32-6AAx 1TG35-8AAx 1TG38-1AAx
1TG33-3AAx 1TG38-8AAx
1TG41-0AAx
1TG41-3AAx
Cooling air [m³/s] 0.17 0.23 0.36 0.78 1.08
requirement
Min. opening
cross-section in
cabinet inlet
outlet
[m²] 0.1 0.1 0.19 0.28 0.38
[m²] 0.1 0.1 0.19 0.28 0.38

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 339
Cabinet design and EMC
8.3 Cabinet air conditioning

Air-cooled chassis power units

340 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Maintenance and Servicing 9
9.1 Chapter content
This chapter provides information on the following:
● Maintenance and servicing procedures that have to be carried out on a regular basis to
ensure the availability of the components.
● Exchanging device components when the unit is serviced
● Forming the DC-link capacitors

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
The non-observance of the fundamental safety instructions and residual risks stated in
Chapter 1 can result in accidents with severe injuries or death.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

DANGER
Danger to life through electric shock due to the residual charge of the DC link capacitors
Because of the DC link capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to five minutes
after the power supply has been switched off.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Only open the device after five minutes have elapsed.
• Measure the voltage before starting work on the DCP and DCN DC link terminals.

DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock from external supply voltages
When the external power supply or the external 230 VAC auxiliary supply is connected,
dangerous voltages are still present in components even when the main circuit-breaker is
open.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Switch off any external supply voltages and the external 230 VAC auxiliary supply
before opening the device.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 341
Maintenance and Servicing
9.2 Maintenance

9.2 Maintenance
The devices comprise mostly electronic components. Apart from the fan(s), therefore, they
contain hardly any components that are subject to wear or that require maintenance or
servicing. Maintenance is intended to ensure that the equipment remains in the specified
condition. Dirt and contamination must be removed regularly and parts subject to wear
replaced.
The following points must generally be observed.

Cleaning
Dust deposits
Dust deposits inside the device must be removed at regular intervals (or at least once a
year) by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations. The unit must be
cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner, and dry compressed air (max. 1 bar) for areas
that cannot be easily reached.
Ventilation
The ventilation openings in the devices must never be obstructed. The fans must be checked
to make sure that they are functioning correctly.
Cable and screw terminals
Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly to ensure that they are secure in
position, and if necessary, retightened. Cabling must be checked for defects. Defective parts
must be replaced immediately.

Note
Maintenance intervals
The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the
installation conditions (cabinet environment) and the operating conditions.
Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details,
contact your regional office or sales office.

Air-cooled chassis power units

342 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.3 Maintenance

9.3 Maintenance
Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintaining and restoring the specified
condition of the devices.

Required tools
The following tools are required for replacing components:
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 10)
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 13)
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 16/17)
● Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 18/19)
● Hexagon-socket spanner (size 8)
● Torque wrench
● Screwdriver size 1/2
● Screwdriver Torx T20/T25/T30
A socket wrench set with two long extensions is recommended.

Tightening torques for screw connections

The following tightening torques apply when tightening current-conducting connections (DC
link connections, motor connections, busbars, lugs) and other connections (ground
connections, protective conductor connections, steel threaded connections).

Table 9- 1 Tightening torques for screw connections

Thread Ground connections, protective Aluminum threaded connections,

conductor connections, steel plastic, busbars, lugs
threaded connections
M3 1.3 Nm 0.8 Nm
M4 3 Nm 1.8 Nm
M5 6 Nm 3 Nm
M6 10 Nm 6 Nm
M8 25 Nm 13 Nm
M10 50 Nm 25 Nm
M12 88 Nm 50 Nm
M16 215 Nm 115 Nm

Note
Screw connections for protective covers
The threaded connections for the protective covers made of Makrolon may only be tightened
with 2.5 Nm.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 343
Maintenance and Servicing
9.3 Maintenance

9.3.1 Installation device

Description
The installation device is used for installing and removing the power blocks for the Basic Line
Modules, Smart Line Modules, Active Line Modules, and Motor Modules in chassis format.
It is used as a mounting aid and is placed in front of and secured to the module. The
telescopic rails allow the withdrawable device to be adjusted according to the height at which
the power blocks are installed. Once the mechanical and electrical connections have been
undone, the power block can be removed from the module, whereby the power block is
guided and supported by the guide rails on the withdrawable devices.

Figure 9-1 Installation device

Order number
The order number for the installation device is 6SL3766-1FA00-0AA0.

Air-cooled chassis power units

344 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.3 Maintenance

9.3.2 Using crane lifting lugs to transport power blocks

Crane lifting lugs

The power blocks are fitted with crane lifting lugs for transportation on a lifting harness in the
context of replacement.
The positions of the crane lifting lugs are illustrated by arrows in the figures below.

NOTICE
Damage to the device due to improper transport
Improper transport can cause mechanical loads on the power block housing or the busbars,
which result in damage to the device.
• When transporting the power blocks, use a lifting harness with vertical ropes or chains.
• Do not use the power block busbars to support or secure lifting harnesses.

Figure 9-2 Crane lifting lugs on power block frame size FX, GX, FB

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 345
Maintenance and Servicing
9.3 Maintenance

Figure 9-3 Crane lifting lugs on HX, JX power block

Note
Crane lifting lugs on HX, JX power block
On HX and JX power blocks, the front crane lifting lug is located behind the busbar.

Air-cooled chassis power units

346 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.3 Maintenance

Figure 9-4 Crane lifting lugs on power block frame size GB, GD

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 347
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4 Replacing components

9.4.1 Safety information

WARNING
Danger to life due to improper transport or installation of devices and components
Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are
not transported or installed properly.
• Transport, mount, and remove the devices and components only if you are qualified to
do so.
• Take into account that the devices and components are in some cases heavy and top-
heavy; take the necessary precautionary measures.
The weights of the individual power blocks are listed in the corresponding section.

Air-cooled chassis power units

348 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.2 Replacing the power block, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame size FX

Replacing the power block

Figure 9-5 Replacing the power block, Active Line Module, and Motor Module (type FX)

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 349
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access to the power block
● Remove the front cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Unscrew the connection to the line or to the motor (three screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the DC link (four screws).
3. Remove the retaining screws at the top (two screws).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (two screws).
5. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
6. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
7. Remove the mounts for the Control Interface Module (two nuts) and carefully pull out the
Control Interface Module.
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional
plugs one after the other (two at the top, three below).
8. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables
(five connectors).
9. Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple.
10.Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the equipment for assembling the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Note
The power block weighs approx. 66 kg!

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the power block is removed. This can cause the
device to fail.
• When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

350 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 351
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.3 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor
Module, frame size GX

Replacing the power block

Figure 9-6 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

352 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access to the power block
● Remove the front cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Unscrew the connection to the line or to the motor (three screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the DC link (four screws).
3. Remove the retaining screws at the top (two screws).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (two screws).
5. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
6. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
7. Remove the mount for the Control Interface Module (one nut) and carefully pull out the
Control Interface Module.
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional
plugs one after the other (two at the top, three below).
8. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables
(five connectors) and release the cable connectors for the signal cables (two connectors).
9. Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple.
10.Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the equipment for assembling the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Note
The power block weighs approx. 89 kg!

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the power block is removed. This can cause the
device to fail.
• When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 353
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Note
Connection clip for the basic interference suppression module on the Smart Line Module,
frame size GX
The connection clip for the basic interference suppression module is mounted on the spare
power block together with a yellow warning label.
Please note the information in the chapter "Electrical connection" of the corresponding
device.

Air-cooled chassis power units

354 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.4 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor
Module, frame size HX

Replacing the left-hand power block

Figure 9-7 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size HX - left power block

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 355
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access to the power block
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the busbar (six screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the DC link (eight nuts).
3. Remove the retaining screw at the top (one screw).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (two screws).
5. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables (two
connectors).
6. Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection (one
connector).
7. Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the equipment for assembling the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Note
The power block weighs approx. 64 kg!

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the power block is removed. This can cause the
device to fail.
• When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

356 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 357
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Replacing the right-hand power block

Figure 9-8 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size HX - right power block

Air-cooled chassis power units

358 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access to the power block
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the busbar (twelve screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the DC link (eight nuts).
3. Remove the retaining screw at the top (one screw).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (two screws).
5. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables (two
connectors).
The second plug connection for the fiber optic cables cannot be disconnected until the
power block has been pulled out slightly.
6. Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection (two
connectors).
7. Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the equipment for assembling the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Note
The power block weighs approx. 86 kg!
The second plug connection for the fiber optic cables cannot be disconnected until the power
block has been pulled out slightly (see Step 5).

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the power block is removed. This can cause the
device to fail.
• When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 359
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

360 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.5 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor
Module, frame size JX

Replacing the power block

Figure 9-9 Replacing the power block, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 361
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access to the power block
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Unscrew the connection to the line or to the motor (eight screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the DC link (eight nuts).
3. Remove the retaining screw at the top (one screw).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (two screws).
5. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables (three
connectors).
6. Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection (one
connector).
7. Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the equipment for assembling the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Note
The power block weighs approx. 90 kg!

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the power block is removed. This can cause the
device to fail.
• When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

362 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 363
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.6 Replacing the power block, Basic Line Module, frame size FB

Replacing the power block

Figure 9-10 Replacing the power block, Basic Line Module, frame size FB

Air-cooled chassis power units

364 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access to the power block
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Unscrew the connection to the DC link (four screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the line connection (six screws).
3. Remove the retaining screws at the top (two screws).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (two screws).
5. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
6. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
7. Remove the mounts for the Control Interface Module (one screw and two nuts) and
carefully pull out the Control Interface Module.
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional
plugs one after the other (two at the top, three below).
8. Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple.
9. Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the equipment for assembling the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Note
The power block weighs approx. 65 kg!

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the power block is removed. This can cause the
device to fail.
• When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 365
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.

Note
Connection clip for the basic interference suppression module
The connection clip for the basic interference suppression module is mounted on the spare
power block together with a yellow warning label.
Please note the information in the chapter "Electrical connection" of the corresponding
device.

Air-cooled chassis power units

366 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.7 Replacing the power block, Basic Line Module GB, GD

Replacing the power block

Figure 9-11 Replacing the power block, Basic Line Module, frame sizes GB, GD

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 367
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access to the power block
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Unscrew the connection to the DC link (six screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the line connection (nine screws).
3. Remove the retaining screws at the top (four screws).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (two screws).
5. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
6. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
7. Remove the mounts for the Control Interface Module (two nuts) and carefully pull out the
Control Interface Module.
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional
plugs one after the other (two at the top, three below).
8. Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple.
9. Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the equipment for assembling the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Note
The power block weighs approx. 135 kg!

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the power block is removed. This can cause the
device to fail.
• When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Air-cooled chassis power units

368 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.

Note
Connection clip for the basic interference suppression module
The connection clip for the basic interference suppression module is mounted on the spare
power block together with a yellow warning label.
Please note the information in the chapter "Electrical connection" of the corresponding
device.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 369
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.8 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Active Line Module and Motor Module,
frame size FX

Replacing the Control Interface Module

Figure 9-12 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Active Line Module and Motor Module, frame
size FX

Air-cooled chassis power units

370 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the front cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the mount for the CU320 (one nut).
2. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables
(five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
4. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
5. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws).
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional plugs
one after the other (two at the top, three below).

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the Control Interface Module is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the Control Interface Module, ensure that you do not damage any signal
cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Tightening torque for the retaining screws of the Control Interface Module (M6 x 16, item ⑤):
6 Nm.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 371
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.9 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line
Module, and Motor Module, frame size GX

Replacing the Control Interface Module

Figure 9-13 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and
Motor Module, frame size GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

372 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the front cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the mount for the CU320 (one nut).
2. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables
(five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
4. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
5. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws).
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional plugs
one after the other (two at the top, three below).

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the Control Interface Module is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the Control Interface Module, ensure that you do not damage any signal
cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Tightening torque for the retaining screws of the Control Interface Module (M6 x 16, item ⑤):
6 Nm.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 373
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.10 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line
Module, and Motor Module, frame size HX

Replacing the Control Interface Module

Figure 9-14 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and
Motor Module, frame size HX

Air-cooled chassis power units

374 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the mount for the CU320 (one nut).
2. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables
(five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
4. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
5. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws).
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional plugs
one after the other (two at the top, three below).

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the Control Interface Module is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the Control Interface Module, ensure that you do not damage any signal
cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Tightening torque for the retaining screws of the Control Interface Module (M6 x 16, item ⑤):
6 Nm.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 375
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.11 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line
Module, and Motor Module, frame size JX

Replacing the Control Interface Module

Figure 9-15 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and
Motor Module, frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

376 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the mount for the CU320 (one nut).
2. Disconnect the plug-in connections for the fiber-optic cables and signal cables
(five connectors).
3. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
4. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
5. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws).
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional plugs
one after the other (two at the top, three below).

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the Control Interface Module is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the Control Interface Module, ensure that you do not damage any signal
cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Tightening torque for the retaining screws of the Control Interface Module (M6 x 16, item ⑤):
6 Nm.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.
The fiber-optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot. Fiber-optic cables and
sockets are labeled to ensure that they are assigned correctly (U11, U21, U31).

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 377
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.12 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size FB

Replacing the Control Interface Module

Figure 9-16 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size FB

Air-cooled chassis power units

378 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the front cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Disconnect the plugs for the signal cables (two connectors).
2. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
3. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
4. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws).
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional plugs
one after the other (two at the top, three below).

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the Control Interface Module is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the Control Interface Module, ensure that you do not damage any signal
cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Tightening torque for the retaining screws of the Control Interface Module (M6 x 16, item ④):
6 Nm.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 379
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.13 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame size GB, GD

Replacing the Control Interface Module

Figure 9-17 Replacing the Control Interface Module, Basic Line Module, frame sizes GB, GD

Air-cooled chassis power units

380 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the front cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Disconnect the plugs for the signal cables (two connectors).
2. Remove DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections at –X41/–X42/–X46 (six connectors).
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables should be marked to ensure that they are subsequently correctly
inserted.
3. Take out the retaining screws for the IPD card (two screws) and remove the IPD card
from plug -X45 on the Control Interface Module.
4. Remove the retaining screws for the Control Interface Module (two screws).
When removing the Control Interface Module, you have to disconnect five additional plugs
one after the other (two at the top, three below).

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the Control Interface Module is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the Control Interface Module, ensure that you do not damage any signal
cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Tightening torque for the retaining screws of the Control Interface Module (M6 x 16, item ④):
6 Nm.

Note
Specifications for the installation
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.
Carefully insert the plug-in connections and ensure that they are secure.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 381
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.14 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame sizes FX, GX

Replacing the fan

Figure 9-18 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame
sizes FX, GX

Air-cooled chassis power units

382 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the front cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan
(2 for FX; 3 for GX).
2. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 383
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.15 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size HX

Replacing the fan (left-hand power block)

Figure 9-19 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame
size HX - left power block

Air-cooled chassis power units

384 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the busbar (six screws).
2. Remove the retaining screws for the fan (three screws).
3. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 385
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Replacing the fan (right-hand power block)

Figure 9-20 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame
size HX - right power block

Air-cooled chassis power units

386 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the busbars (twelve screws).
2. Remove the retaining screws for the fan (three screws).
3. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 387
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.16 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size JX

Replacing the fan

Figure 9-21 Replacing the fan, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module, frame
size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

388 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the busbar (eight screws).
2. Remove the retaining screws for the fan (three screws).
3. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 389
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.17 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size FI

Replacing the fan

Figure 9-22 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size FI

Air-cooled chassis power units

390 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan unit (two screws).
2. Unplug connector –X630.
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 391
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.18 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size GI

Replacing the fan

Figure 9-23 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size GI

Air-cooled chassis power units

392 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply.
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan unit (3 screws).
2. Unplug connector –X630.
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 393
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.19 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size HI

Replacing the fan

Figure 9-24 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size HI

Air-cooled chassis power units

394 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan unit (3 screws).
2. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 395
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.20 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size JI

Replacing the fan

Figure 9-25 Replacing the fan, Active Interface Module, frame size JI

Air-cooled chassis power units

396 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan unit (3 screws).
2. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 397
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.21 Replacing the fan, Basic Line Module, frame sizes FB, GB, GD

Replacing the fan

Figure 9-26 Replacing the fan, Basic Line Module, frame sizes FB, GB and GD

Air-cooled chassis power units

398 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables (e.g. ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.)
and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan
(two screws for frame size FB, three screws for frame size GB)
2. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables become damaged during removal
Signal cables can become damaged when the fan is removed. This can cause the device to
fail.
• When removing the fan, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 399
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.22 Replacing the DC fuses, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor
Module, frame size HX

Replacing the DC fuses

Figure 9-27 Replacing the DC fuses, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size HX

Air-cooled chassis power units

400 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The DC fuses are installed in a fuse insert. To replace the fuses, the fuse insert be removed.

NOTICE
Device failure after a DC fuse trips
The neighboring DC fuses may also become damaged if a DC fuse trips. Failure to replace
all fuses at the same time can cause the device to fail.
• After a DC fuse trips, always replace all DC fuses at the same time. Always use fuses of
the same type.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Release the DC connections at DCP and DCN (four screws each)
2. Remove nuts (eight screws)
3. Remove the retaining screws for the connection plate of the housing (four screws) and
remove the connection plate
4. Remove the retaining screw for the fuse insert (one screw)
You can now remove the fuse insert.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables or plastic parts become damaged during removal
Signal cables or plastic parts can become damaged when the fuse insert is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the fuse insert, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables or
plastic parts.

You can then replace the DC fuses.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 401
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

Air-cooled chassis power units

402 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

9.4.23 Replacing the DC fuses, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor
Module, frame size JX

Replacing the DC fuses

Figure 9-28 Replacing the DC fuses, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module,
frame size JX

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 403
Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Description
The DC fuses are installed in a fuse insert. To replace the fuses, the fuse insert be removed.

NOTICE
Device failure after a DC fuse trips
The neighboring DC fuses may also become damaged if a DC fuse trips. Failure to replace
all fuses at the same time can cause the device to fail.
• After a DC fuse trips, always replace all DC fuses at the same time. Always use fuses of
the same type.

Preparatory steps
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply
● Allow unimpeded access
● Remove the protective cover

Removal
The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the numbers in the diagram.
1. Release the DC connections at DCP and DCN (four screws each)
2. Remove nuts (eight screws)
3. Remove the retaining screws for the connection plate of the housing (four screws) and
remove the connection plate
4. Remove the retaining screw for the fuse insert (one screw)
You can now remove the fuse insert.

NOTICE
Damage to the device if signal cables or plastic parts become damaged during removal
Signal cables or plastic parts can become damaged when the fuse insert is removed. This
can cause the device to fail.
• When removing the fuse insert, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables or
plastic parts.

You can then replace the DC fuses.

Air-cooled chassis power units

404 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.4 Replacing components

Installation steps
To reinstall, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Note
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the table "Tightening torques for screw connections" must
be observed.

9.4.24 Replacing the fan fuses (-F10/-F11)

The order numbers for replacement fan fuses can be found in the spare parts list.

Note
Removing fault causes
Make sure that the cause of the fault is found before the fuse is replaced.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 405
Maintenance and Servicing
9.5 Forming the DC link capacitors

9.5 Forming the DC link capacitors

Description
If the Basic Line Module, Smart Line Module, Active Line Module, and Motor Module have
not been used for more than two years, the DC-link capacitors must be reformed. If this is
not carried out, the units could be damaged when the DC-link voltage is connected under
load.
If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture, the DC-link
capacitors do not need to be re-formed. The date of manufacture can be taken from the
serial number on the rating plate.

Note
Storage period
It is important that the storage period is calculated from the date of manufacture and not from
the date that the equipment was shipped.

Rating plate

Figure 9-29 Rating plate using an Active Line Module as example

Air-cooled chassis power units

406 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.5 Forming the DC link capacitors

Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture can be determined as follows:

Table 9- 2 Production year and month

Character Year of manufacture Character Month of manufacture

A 2010 1 ... 9 January to September
B 2011 O October
C 2012 N November
D 2013 D December
E 2014
F 2015
H 2016
J 2017
K 2018
L 2019
M 2020

Procedure in the event of repair or replacement

A replacement Line Module or Motor Module or the corresponding replacement power block
has to be re-formed after being in storage for a period of more than two years.
The DC-link capacitors are re-formed by applying the rated voltage without load for at least
30 minutes.
To do this, the DC link must be precharged (i.e. the Line Modules switched on), while the
controller for the existing Motor Modules must not be enabled for the specified length of time.

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 407
Maintenance and Servicing
9.5 Forming the DC link capacitors

Procedure for re-forming outside the drive line-up

Replacement power units which have to be held ready for immediate use in the event of
repair or replacement can also be re-formed individually and outside the drive line-up.
For this, the equipment must be connected to the forming circuits described in the following.
Components for the forming circuit (recommendation)
● One fuse switch 3 AC 400 V / 10 A or 690 V / 10 A
● Three incandescent lamps 230 V / 100 W for a line voltage of 3 AC 380 to 480 V.
Alternatively, use three resistors of 1 kΩ / 100 W each (e.g. GWK150J1001KLX000 from
Vishay) instead of the incandescent lamps.
● Six incandescent lamps 230 V / 100 W for a line voltage of 3 AC 500 to 690 V, where two
incandescent lamps must be connected in series in each supply phase.
Alternatively, use three resistors of 1 kΩ / 160 W each (e.g. GWK200J1001KLX000 from
Vishay) instead of the incandescent lamps.
● Various small components, such as lamp sockets, cable 1.5 mm2, etc.

CAUTION
Install lamp sockets with insulation
For a line voltage of 3 AC 500 to 690 V, the two lamp sockets connected in series must
be insulated and protected from touch, because the insulation of the sockets is not
designed for this high voltage.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock from non-insulated lamp sockets
If two incandescent lamps connected in series are used, the insulation of the lamp
sockets is not designed for a high voltage of 3 AC 500 to 690 V.
• For a line voltage of 3 AC 500 to 690 V, insulate the two lamp sockets connected in
series and protect them from being touched.

Air-cooled chassis power units

408 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Maintenance and Servicing
9.5 Forming the DC link capacitors

Forming circuit for Line Modules

Note
Forming the Line Modules
Voltage must be supplied to Line Modules via a connected Motor Module and the associated
DC link.

Figure 9-30 Forming circuit for Line Modules

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 409
Maintenance and Servicing
9.5 Forming the DC link capacitors

Forming circuit for Motor Modules

Figure 9-31 Forming circuit for Motor Modules

Procedure
● The unit being formed must not receive a power-on command (e.g. from the keyboard,
BOP20 or terminal block).
● Connect the appropriate forming circuit.
● During the forming process, the incandescent lamps must become less bright or go
completely dark. If the incandescent lamps continue to be brightly lit, a fault has occurred
in the drive unit or in the wiring.

Maintaining the operational readiness of individual power blocks for servicing

It is recommended that during the planned downtimes, the power blocks positioned on the
line side are replaced in order to guarantee the correct functioning of the power blocks
during servicing.

Air-cooled chassis power units

410 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Appendix A
A.1 Cable lugs

Cable lugs
The cable connections on the devices are designed for cable lugs according to DIN 46234 or
DIN 46235.
For connection of alternative cable lugs, the maximum dimensions are listed in the table
below.
These cable lugs are not to exceed these dimensions, as mechanical fastening and
adherence to the voltage distances is not guaranteed otherwise.

Figure A-1 Dimensions of the cable lugs

Table A- 1 Dimensions of the cable lugs

Screw / bolts Connection cross-section d2 b l c1 c2

[mm²] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
M8 70 8.4 24 55 13 10
M10 185 10.5 37 82 15 12
M10 240 13 42 92 16 13
M12 95 13 28 65 16 13
M12 185 13 37 82 16 13
M12 240 13 42 92 16 13
M16 240 17 42 92 19 16

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 411
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

A.2 List of abbreviations

Table A- 2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
A... Alarm
AC Alternating Current
ADC Analog Digital Converter
AI Analog Input
AO Analog Output
AOP Advanced Operator Panel
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
BB Operating condition
BERO Tradename for a type of proximity switch
BI Binector Input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbeitssicherheit (German Institute for Occupational
Safety)
BICO Binector Connector Technology
BOP Basic Operator Panel
C Capacity
CAN Controller Area Network
CBC Communication Board CAN
CBP Communication Board PROFIBUS
CD Compact Disc
CDS Command Data Set
CI Connector Input
CIB Control Interface Board
CNC Computer Numerical Control
CO Connector Output
CO/BO Connector/Binector Output
COM Medium contact of a change-over contact
CP Communications Processor
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CT Constant Torque
CU Control Unit
DAC Digital Analog Converter
DC Direct Current
DCN Direct current negative
DCNA Direct current negative auxiliary
DCP Direct current positive
DCPA Direct current positive auxiliary
DDS Drive Data Set

Air-cooled chassis power units

412 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
DI Digital Input
DI / DO Bidirectional Digital Input/Output
DMC DRIVE-CLiQ Module Cabinet (Hub)
DO Digital Output
DO Drive Object
DPRAM Dual-Port Random Access Memory
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRIVE-CLiQ Drive Component Link with IQ
DSC Dynamic Servo Control
EDS Encoder Data Set
ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
EMV Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
EN European Standard
EnDat Encoder-Data-Interface
EP Enable Pulses
ES Engineering System
F ... Fault
FAQ Frequently Asked Questions
FCC Function Control Chart
FCC Flux Current Control
FEPROM Flash-EPROM
FG Function Generator
FI Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker (ELCB)
Float Floating point
FP Function diagram
FW Firmware
GCP Global Control Telegram (broadcast telegram)
GSD Device master file: describes the features of a PROFIBUS slave
HLG Ramp-function generator
HMI Human Machine Interface
HTL High Threshold Logic
HW Hardware
i. V. in preparation: this feature is currently not available
IBN Commissioning
I/O Input/Output
ID Identifier
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
IT Three-phase supply network, ungrounded
JOG Jogging
KDV Data cross-checking
KIP Kinetic buffering

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 413
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
KTY Special temperature sensor
L Inductance
LED Light Emitting Diode
LSB Least Significant Bit
M Reference potential, zero potential
MB Megabyte
MCC Motion Control Chart
MDS Motor Data Set
MLFB Machine-readable product designation
MMC Man-Machine Communication
MSB Most Significant Bit
MSCY_C1 Master Slave Cycle Class 1
NC Normally Closed (contact)
NC Numerical Control
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NM Zero Mark
NO Normally Open (contact)
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OLP Optical Link Plug
OMI Option Module Interface
p ... Adjustable parameter
PDS Power Module Data Set
PE Protective Earth
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PG Programming terminal
PI Proportional Integral
PLC Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PNO PROFIBUS user organization
PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Signal
PROFIBUS Process Field Bus
PS Power Supply
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient
PTP Point To Point
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
PZD PROFIBUS Process data
r... Display Parameter (read only)
RAM Random Access Memory
RCD Residual Current Device
RJ45 Standard. Describes an 8-pole plug connector with twisted pair Ethernet.
RO Read Only
RS232 Serial Interface

Air-cooled chassis power units

414 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
RS485 Standard. Describes the physical characteristics of a digital serial interface.
S1 Continuous operation
S3 Periodic duty
SBC Safe Brake Control
SGE Safe input signal
SH Safe Standstill
SI Safety Integrated
SIL Safety Integrity Level
SLVC Sensorless Vector Control
SM Sensor Module
SMC Sensor Module Cabinet
SME Sensor Module External
SPS Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
STW PROFIBUS control word
TB Terminal Board
TIA Totally Integrated Automation
TM Terminal Module
TN Three-phase supply network, grounded
TT Three-phase supply network, grounded
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
VC Vector Control
Vdc DC link voltage
VDE Association of German Electrical Engineers
VDI Association of German Engineers
VSM Voltage Sensing Module
VT Variable Torque
WZM Machine tool
XML Extensible Markup Language
ZK DC Link
ZSW PROFIBUS status word

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 415
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Air-cooled chassis power units

416 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
Index

Frame size JX, replacement, 376

Frame sizes GB, GD, replacement, 380
A
Active Interface Modules, 73
D
Dimension drawing, 86
Active Line Modules, 164 DC fuses
Dimension drawing, 180 Frame size HX, replacement, 400
Frame size JX, replacement, 403
DC-link components
B Braking Module, 237
Braking resistors, 263
Backup
Derating factors
Fan (-F10/-F11), 405
Current derating as a function of the pulse
Basic Line Modules, 100
frequency, 232
Dimension drawing, 115
Function of installation altitude and ambient
Basic structure
temperature, 35
and regulated infeed, 39
Dimension drawing
and unregulated infeed, 41
Active Interface Modules, 86
with unregulated infeed / regenerative feedback, 40
Active Line Modules, 180
Basic structure of a drive system with SINAMICS
Basic Line Modules, 115
S120, 39
Braking resistors, 266
Braking Module, 237
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 317
Braking resistor connection, 244
dv/dt reactor, 294
Installation, 248
Line filters for Active Line Modules, 54
S1 – Threshold switch, 246
Line filters for Basic Line Modules, 47
X21 digital inputs/outputs, 245
Line filters for Smart Line Modules, 54
Braking resistors, 263
Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 60
Dimension drawing, 266
Line reactors for Smart Line Modules, 66
Motor Modules, 211
Motor reactors, 278
C
Sine-wave filter, 274
Cabinet design and EMC, 327 Smart Line Modules, 148
Cable lugs, 411 Voltage peak limiter, 297
Cleaning, 342 Disconnect the basic interference suppression
Connection module, 90, 117, 151
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 315 dv/dt filter, 286
dv/dt filter with voltage peak limiter, 292 Interfaces, 290
Connection example dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 307
Active Interface Modules, 80 Connection, 315
Braking Module, 244 Dimension drawing, 317
Control cabinet design dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
Air conditioning, 330 Interfaces, 311
Ventilation, 331 dv/dt filter with voltage peak limiter
Control Interface Module Connection, 292
Frame size FB, replacement, 378 dv/dt reactor
Frame size FX, replacement, 370 Dimension drawing, 294
Frame size GX, replacement, 372
Frame size HX, replacement, 374

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 417
Index

E Line filters for Active Line Modules, 50

Dimension drawing, 54
Electromagnetic fields, 20
Line filters for Basic Line Modules, 43
Electrostatic sensitive devices, 21
Dimension drawing, 47
EMC
Line filters for Smart Line Modules, 50
General, 327
Dimension drawing, 54
Line Modules, 99
Active Line Modules, 164
F
Basic Line Modules, 100
Fan Smart Line Modules, 133
Frame size FI, replacement, 390 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 58
Frame size GI, replacement, 392 Dimension drawing, 60
Frame size HI, replacement, 394 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules, 64
Frame size HX, replacement, 384 Dimension drawing, 66
Frame size JI, replacement, 396 Line-side power components, 43
Frame size JX, replacement, 388 Active Interface Modules, 73
Frame sizes FB, GB, GD, replacement, 398 Line filters for Active Line Modules, 50
Frame sizes FX and GX, replacement, 382 Line filters for Basic Line Modules, 43
Fan voltage Line filters for Smart Line Modules, 50
Active Line Modules, 184 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 58
Basic Line Modules, 120 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules, 64
Motor Modules, 215 List of abbreviations, 412
Smart Line Modules, 155
Forming the DC-link capacitors, 406
Fundamental safety instructions M
SINAMICS hardware, 17
Maintenance, 342, 343
Maintenance and servicing, 341
Maximum cable lengths, 329
H
Motor Modules, 195
Hotline, 7 Dimension drawing, 211
Minimum cable length, 234
Parallel connection, 234
I Motor reactors, 276
Dimension drawing, 278
Installation device, 344
Motor-side power components, 271
Interfaces
dv/dt filter, 286
Active Interface Modules, 76
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 307
Basic Line Modules, 105
Motor reactors, 276
Braking Module, 241
Sine-wave filter, 271
dv/dt filter, 290
dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter, 311
Smart Line Modules, 139
N
IT system, 90, 117, 151
Non-grounded system, 90, 117, 151

L
O
LEDs
Active Interface Modules, 85 Operation on a non-grounded system, 90, 117, 151
Active Line Modules, 179 Overload capability Basic Line Modules, 132
Basic Line Modules, 114 High overload, 132
Motor Modules, 210 Overload capability of Active Line Modules, 194
Smart Line Modules, 147 High overload, 194

Air-cooled chassis power units

418 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4
 Index

Overload capability of the Motor Modules, 230 S

High overload, 231
Safety information
Low overload, 231
Active Interface Modules, 74
Overload reserve for Smart Line Modules, 163
Active Line Modules, 167, 197
High overload, 163
Basic Line Modules, 102
Braking Modules, 239
Braking resistors, 264
P
dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 309
Parallel connection EMC, 328
Motor Modules, 234 Line filters for Active Line Modules, 51
Power block Line filters for Basic Line Modules, 44
Crane lifting lugs, 345 Line filters for Smart Line Modules, 51
Frame size FB, replacement, 364 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 58
Frame size FX, replacement, 349 Line reactors for Smart Line Modules, 64
Frame size GX, replacement, 352 Motor reactors, 276
Frame size HX, replacement, 355 Sine-wave filter, 272
Frame size JX, replacement, 361 Smart Line Modules, 136
Frame sizes GB, GD, replacement, 367 Safety instructions
Control cabinet design, 328
dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter, 288
R Electromagnetic fields, 20
Electrostatic sensitive devices, 21
Replacement
General safety instructions, 17
Control Interface Module, frame sizes GB, GD, 380
Maintenance and servicing, 341
Replacing
Sine-wave filter, 271
Control Interface Module, frame size FB, 378
Dimension drawing, 274
Control Interface Module, frame size FX, 370
Smart Line Modules, 133
Control Interface Module, frame size GX, 372
Dimension drawing, 148
Control Interface Module, frame size HX, 374
Standards, 36
Control Interface Module, frame size JX, 376
Support, 7
Crane lifting lugs, 345
System overview, 25
DC fuses, frame size HX, 400
DC fuses, frame size JX, 403
Fan, frame size FI, 390
T
Fan, frame size GI, 392
Fan, frame size HI, 394 Technical data
Fan, frame size HX, 384 Active Interface Modules, 96
Fan, frame size JX, 388, 396 Active Line Modules, 186
Fan, frame sizes FB, GB, GD, 398 Basic Line Modules, 124
Fan, frame sizes FX and GX, 382 Braking Modules, 260
Installation device, 344 Braking resistors, 268
Power block, frame size FB, 364 Derating factors, 35
Power block, frame size FX, 349 dv/dt filter compact plus voltage peak limiter, 322
Power block, frame size GX, 352 dv/dt filter plus voltage peak limiter, 300
Power block, frame size HX, 355 General technical data, 32
Power block, frame size JX, 361 Line filters for Active Line Modules, 57
Power block, frame sizes GB, GD, 367 Line filters for Basic Line Modules, 49
Replacing components, 348 Line filters for Smart Line Modules, 57
Residual risks of drive systems, 22 Line reactors for Basic Line Modules, 62
Line reactors for Smart Line Modules, 72
Motor Modules, 217
Motor reactors, 282

Air-cooled chassis power units

Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4 419
Index

Sine-wave filter, 275

Smart Line Modules, 157
Technical support, 7
Tightening torques, 343
Tool, 343

V
Voltage peak limiter
Dimension drawing, 297

Air-cooled chassis power units

420 Manual, (GH3), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AE00-0BP4